WO2022206780A1 - 电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质 - Google Patents

电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022206780A1
WO2022206780A1 PCT/CN2022/083803 CN2022083803W WO2022206780A1 WO 2022206780 A1 WO2022206780 A1 WO 2022206780A1 CN 2022083803 W CN2022083803 W CN 2022083803W WO 2022206780 A1 WO2022206780 A1 WO 2022206780A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
parameter
display
hardware
hardware parameter
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/083803
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
吕飞帆
张华�
张运超
武小宇
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022206780A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022206780A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • G06F3/1454—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units involving copying of the display data of a local workstation or window to a remote workstation or window so that an actual copy of the data is displayed simultaneously on two or more displays, e.g. teledisplay
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/0412—Digitisers structurally integrated in a display
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units

Definitions

  • the present application belongs to the technical field of device management, and in particular, relates to a display method, apparatus, electronic device, and readable storage medium of an electronic device.
  • the display effects of the same data content on different electronic devices may also vary to some extent.
  • the image data stored in the electronic device generally adopts the red, green and blue RGB format.
  • the electronic device determines the pixel point in the display module on the electronic device according to the pixel value of each pixel point in the image data.
  • the color displayed at the corresponding display position but due to the different display principles of the display modules of different electronic devices, for example, the display module of a certain electronic device is a liquid crystal display LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) module, which is based on the backlight of the backplane.
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display
  • the colored film thus shows the corresponding color
  • the display module of another electronic device is an organic electric laser OLED (Organic Light-Emitting Diode) module, which is based on the principle of self-luminescence.
  • OLED Organic Light-Emitting Diode
  • the display effect is inconsistent.
  • the inconsistency of the above-mentioned display effects can be reflected in many aspects, such as the clarity of the picture and the color range (ie, color gamut), in addition to the color deviation.
  • the display effects of different electronic devices are inconsistent, which will greatly affect the user experience and reduce the accuracy of user operations.
  • a user draws an image on a smartphone. After the drawing is completed, the user can save the drawn image and store it in the memory of the smartphone. If the subsequent user needs to edit the drawn image on another device, such as editing on a tablet computer, the smartphone can send the locally stored image file to the tablet computer, and the tablet computer can display the received image file on the display module. To the image file, the corresponding image is generated.
  • the communication effect of the user during the video conference will also be affected.
  • user A and user B are in a video conference on the same case, and the content discussed by user A and user B is to analyze several pictures.
  • the picture can be a painting or a color Doppler ultrasound image, that is, Color Doppler. Taking the discussion of a color Doppler ultrasound as an example, user A and user B need to determine the patient's physical condition on the color Doppler ultrasound to obtain corresponding medical advice.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of screen projection and display of a certain data content between different electronic devices.
  • the user holds two electronic devices, one is a smart phone and the other is a smart TV.
  • the smart phone can send the locally displayed content to the smart TV for display, so as to realize cross-device screen projection Function.
  • the user can draw an image on the smartphone, and project the image in the drawing process on the smartphone to the smart TV for display. Due to the small size of the screen on a smartphone, in order to further see the details of the drawing process, the user can create an image by comparing the content displayed on the two screens of the smart TV and the smartphone while drawing the image.
  • the existing solution relies on manual correction by the user.
  • the problem of color shift is not caused by inconsistent data when the data content is displayed on different electronic devices, but is determined by factors such as hardware devices and display parameters between electronic devices, and the above differences are for electronic devices. It is unmeasurable. Therefore, it is often the user who observes the difference in the display effect of two electronic devices when displaying the same data content with the naked eye, and adjusts the display parameters of one electronic device or two electronic devices at the same time, so as to keep the two electronic devices.
  • the display effect of electronic equipment is consistent.
  • the above method depends on the user's understanding of the influence of various display parameters on the display effect. For example, if a certain display parameter includes the backlight intensity, the user needs to know how to adjust the backlight intensity, which will greatly increase the impact on the electronic device when displaying the image. This reduces the difficulty of consistent adjustment of display effects between electronic devices. In addition, in order to improve the accuracy of adjustment, the number of display parameters that can be configured by electronic devices is often large, which also makes the adjustment process cumbersome and complicated. For some differences in display effects, such as the clarity and color between two electronic devices It is difficult to determine the difference through one or several pictures, so it is difficult for the user to manually adjust, which further increases the difficulty of manual adjustment.
  • Another existing method for solving inconsistent display effects is as follows: in a scenario that requires multiple devices to work together, for example, during a video conference between multiple users, different users can use the same type of electronic
  • the display parameters of the electronic device are kept uniform, thereby ensuring the same display effect when displaying the same data content. Since different users use the same type of electronic equipment, the hardware modules used by different electronic equipment are the same, and the hardware parameters such as the material of the electronic equipment and the light source of the display module are the same. Ensure that the display effect between different electronic devices is consistent.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a display method, device, electronic device, and readable storage medium for electronic equipment, which can solve the existing equipment management technology.
  • the adjustment is difficult and the adjustment efficiency is low.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a display method for an electronic device, including:
  • the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter about the first electronic device to the second electronic device;
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device
  • the second electronic device displays the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content and the display of the first electronic device.
  • the second display effect of the data content is the same.
  • Implementing the embodiments of the present application has the following beneficial effects: by sending the first hardware parameters and the first display parameters of the first electronic device to the second electronic device that needs to synchronize the display effect, the second electronic device can The second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter are determined to determine the second display parameter of the second electronic device, and the second display parameter determined based on the above three parameters can eliminate the first electronic device and the second electronic device. Due to different hardware devices, the display effect is affected. In the subsequent display process, the second electronic device can display the data content according to the second display parameters, so as to ensure the relationship between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the corresponding display effects of the same content are kept the same, to avoid deviations in the display effects of the same data content due to differences in hardware modules or display settings, and to improve the accuracy of display parameter settings.
  • one of the electronic devices can also determine the local display parameters according to the hardware parameters fed back by the other electronic device and the display parameters of the opposite end.
  • the setting process is performed automatically by the device, which is insensitive to the user, and does not require the user to manually configure the display parameters and frequently manually adjust the electronic equipment of the device, thereby improving the efficiency of parameter setting and the user experience.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following: a second contrast ratio, a second dynamic range, a second color gamut, a second brightness, and a second clarity;
  • the first display effect of the second electronic device displaying the data content is consistent with the second display effect of the first electronic device displaying the data content, including at least one of the following:
  • the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast is less than a preset first threshold
  • the difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range is less than a preset second threshold
  • the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut is less than a preset third threshold
  • the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness is less than a preset fourth threshold
  • the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is less than a preset fifth threshold.
  • the second electronic device determines a second display parameter according to a second hardware parameter of the second electronic device, the first hardware parameter, and the first display parameter ,include:
  • the second electronic device generates a display correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter;
  • the second electronic device obtains the second display parameter by adjusting the third display parameter of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device generates a display correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • the second electronic device obtains the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameter and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device searches an offline database for a calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter
  • the second electronic device extracts the disparity correction parameter associated with the second hardware parameter from the correction parameter package.
  • the second electronic device searches for a correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter from an offline database, including:
  • the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate a download request, and send the download request to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the download request.
  • the second electronic device if the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate a download request, and send the download request to the cloud server, including:
  • the second electronic device generates the download request in response to the confirmation operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, and sends the download request to the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameter and the first hardware parameter to the cloud server in response to the rejection operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information;
  • the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device determines a second display parameter according to a second hardware parameter of the second electronic device, the first hardware parameter, and the first display parameter ,include:
  • the second electronic device searches for a preset parameter matching the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter from a preset comparison parameter relationship table, and uses the preset parameter as the second display parameter.
  • the method before the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter about the first electronic device to the second electronic device, the method further includes:
  • the first electronic device In response to a screen projection operation initiated by the user, the first electronic device sends a screen projection instruction to the second electronic device corresponding to the screen projection operation.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a display method for an electronic device, which is applied to a second electronic device, including:
  • the second electronic device receives the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device
  • the second electronic device displays the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays a first display effect of the data content that is the same as the display of the first electronic device.
  • the second display effect of the data content is the same.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following: a second contrast ratio, a second dynamic range, a second color gamut, a second brightness, and a second clarity;
  • the first display effect of the second electronic device displaying the data content is consistent with the second display effect of the first electronic device displaying the data content, including at least one of the following:
  • the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast is less than a preset first threshold
  • the difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range is less than a preset second threshold
  • the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut is less than a preset third threshold
  • the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness is less than a preset fourth threshold
  • the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is less than a preset fifth threshold.
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter ,include:
  • the second electronic device generates a display correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter;
  • the second electronic device obtains the second display parameter by adjusting the third display parameter of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device generates a display correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • the second electronic device obtains the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameter and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device searches an offline database for a calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter
  • the second electronic device extracts the discrepancy correction parameters associated with the second hardware parameters of the second electronic device from the correction parameter package.
  • the second electronic device searches for a correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter from an offline database, including:
  • the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate a download request, and send the download request to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the download request.
  • the second electronic device if the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate a download request, and send the download request to the cloud server, including:
  • the second electronic device generates the download request in response to the confirmation operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, and sends the download request to the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device In response to the rejection operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameters of the second electronic device and the first hardware parameters sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter ,include:
  • the second electronic device searches for a preset parameter matching the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter from a preset comparison parameter relationship table, and uses the preset parameter as the second display parameter.
  • the method before the second electronic device receives the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device, the method further includes:
  • the second electronic device receives a screen projection instruction sent by the first electronic device, where the screen projection instruction is generated by the first electronic device in response to a screen projection operation initiated by a user.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a display device for an electronic device, including:
  • a device reference parameter receiving unit configured to receive the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device
  • a second display parameter determining unit configured to determine a second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device
  • a second display effect synchronization unit configured to display the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content and the first electronic device The second display effect of the device displaying the data content is consistent.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following: a second contrast ratio, a second dynamic range, a second color gamut, a second brightness, and a second clarity;
  • a second contrast synchronizing unit used for the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast being less than a preset first threshold
  • a second dynamic range synchronization unit configured for a difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range to be less than a preset second threshold
  • a second color gamut synchronization unit configured for the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut to be less than a preset third threshold
  • a second brightness synchronization unit configured for the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness to be less than a preset fourth threshold
  • the second definition synchronization unit is used for the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is smaller than a preset fifth threshold.
  • the second display parameter determining unit includes:
  • a display correction parameter generating unit configured to generate display correction parameters based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • a display parameter adjustment unit configured to adjust a third display parameter of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter to obtain the second display parameter.
  • the display correction parameter generating unit includes:
  • a discrepancy correction parameter generating unit configured to obtain discrepancy correction parameters based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • a display correction parameter obtaining unit configured to obtain the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter.
  • the difference correction parameter generating unit includes:
  • a first hardware parameter uploading unit configured to upload the second hardware parameter about the second electronic device and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • a first difference correction parameter receiving unit configured to receive the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the difference correction parameter generating unit includes:
  • a correction parameter package search unit configured to search for a correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter from an offline database
  • a difference correction parameter extraction unit configured to extract the difference correction parameter associated with the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device from the correction parameter package.
  • the correction parameter package search unit includes:
  • a calibration parameter package downloading unit configured to generate a download request if the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is not found in the offline database, and send the download request to the cloud server;
  • a correction parameter package receiving unit configured to receive the correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the download request.
  • the correction parameter package downloading unit includes:
  • a download prompt information generating unit configured to generate download prompt information if the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is not found in the offline database
  • a confirmation download response unit configured to generate the download request in response to a confirmation operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, and send the download request to the cloud server.
  • the calibration parameter package downloading unit includes:
  • a refusal to download response unit configured to, in response to a refusal operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, send the second hardware parameter about the second electronic device and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device Upload to cloud server;
  • a second difference correction parameter receiving unit configured to receive the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second display parameter determining unit is specifically configured to look up the relationship between the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and all the parameters from a preset comparison parameter relationship table.
  • the preset parameter that matches the first display parameter, and the preset parameter is used as the second display parameter.
  • the display apparatus of the electronic device further includes:
  • a screen-casting instruction receiving unit configured to receive a screen-casting instruction sent by the first electronic device, where the screen-casting instruction is generated by the first electronic device in response to a screen-casting operation initiated by a user.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, including one or more touch screens, one or more memories, and one or more processors; wherein the one or more memories store one or more A program; when the one or more processors are executing the one or more programs, the electronic device is made to implement the display method of the electronic device according to any one of the second aspect above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, wherein when the computer program is executed by a processor, any one of the foregoing second aspects is implemented.
  • a display method of the electronic device
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on an electronic device, enables the electronic device to execute the display method for an electronic device according to any one of the second aspects above.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, including a processor, where the processor is coupled to a memory, and the processor executes a computer program stored in the memory, so as to implement the electronic device according to any one of the above-mentioned second aspects.
  • the display method of the device is not limited to any one of the above-mentioned second aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of screen projection display of a certain data content between different electronic devices
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is an interactive flowchart of a display method of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a connection based on a wireless local area network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of initiating a screen projection operation provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an operation of initiating a video call provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of the color gamut before adjustment of the second electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8b is a schematic diagram of a color gamut of a first electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8c is a schematic diagram of a color gamut after adjustment by the second electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9a is a schematic diagram of a display effect of an image before adjustment by the second electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9b is a schematic diagram of a display effect of an image by a first electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9c is a schematic diagram of a display effect of an image after adjustment by the second electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is an interactive flowchart of a display method for an electronic device provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of determining discrepancy correction parameters from a cloud server-based device correction parameter table provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a download process of a calibration parameter package provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the term “if” may be contextually interpreted as “when” or “once” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting “.
  • the phrases “if it is determined” or “if the [described condition or event] is detected” may be interpreted, depending on the context, to mean “once it is determined” or “in response to the determination” or “once the [described condition or event] is detected. ]” or “in response to detection of the [described condition or event]”.
  • references in this specification to "one embodiment” or “some embodiments” and the like mean that a particular feature, structure or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in one or more embodiments of the present application.
  • appearances of the phrases “in one embodiment,” “in some embodiments,” “in other embodiments,” “in other embodiments,” etc. in various places in this specification are not necessarily All refer to the same embodiment, but mean “one or more but not all embodiments” unless specifically emphasized otherwise.
  • the terms “including”, “including”, “having” and their variants mean “including but not limited to” unless specifically emphasized otherwise.
  • the display method for an electronic device can be applied to a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, an augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) device, a notebook computer, a super mobile device
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • UMPC ultra-mobile personal computer
  • netbook netbook
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the electronic device may be a station (STAION, ST) in a WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (Session Initiation Protocol, SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) devices, handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, computers, laptop computers, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, and /or other devices for communicating on wireless systems and next-generation communication systems, for example, mobile terminals in a 5G network or mobile terminals in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) network, etc.
  • STAION Session Initiation Protocol
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic structural diagram of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charge management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and so on.
  • SIM Subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structures illustrated in the embodiments of the present application do not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or less components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural-network processing unit neural-network processing unit
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous transmitter) receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus that includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate with each other through the I2C bus interface, so as to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 110 with the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through a CSI interface, so as to realize the photographing function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and the like.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that conforms to the USB standard specification, and may specifically be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones.
  • the interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charge management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110, and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellites Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation satellite system (GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), and infrared technology (IR).
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication
  • IR infrared technology
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2 .
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Time Division Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • global positioning system global positioning system, GPS
  • global navigation satellite system global navigation satellite system, GLONASS
  • Beidou navigation satellite system beidou navigation satellite system, BDS
  • quasi-zenith satellite system quadsi -zenith satellite system, QZSS
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • Display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • Display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light).
  • emitting diode, AMOLED organic light-emitting diode
  • flexible light-emitting diode flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than one.
  • Display 194 may include a touch panel as well as other input devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera photosensitive element through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera photosensitive element transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin tone.
  • ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object is projected through the lens to generate an optical image onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • a digital signal processor is used to process digital signals, in addition to processing digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy and so on.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 100 can play or record videos of various encoding formats, such as: Moving Picture Experts Group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
  • MPEG2 moving picture experts group
  • MPEG3 MPEG4
  • MPEG4 Moving Picture Experts Group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 .
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like.
  • the storage data area may store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100 and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
  • the electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "speaker" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 170B also referred to as "earpiece" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the voice can be answered by placing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through a human mouth, and input the sound signal into the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may further be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions.
  • the earphone jack 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D may be the USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals, and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194 .
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation whose intensity is less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction for viewing the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion attitude of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyro sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse motion to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenarios.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist in positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip holster using the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Further, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes).
  • the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can measure the distance through infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 can use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in a pocket, so as to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, accessing application locks, taking pictures with fingerprints, answering incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 performs thermal protection by reducing the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 caused by the low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194 , and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to touch operations may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the pulse of the human body and receive the blood pressure beating signal.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibration bone block obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the function of heart rate detection.
  • the keys 190 include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations acting on different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations on different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card and so on. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication.
  • the electronic device 100 employs an eSIM, ie: an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiments of the present application take an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to exemplarily describe the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate with each other through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, which are, from top to bottom, an application layer, an application framework layer, an Android runtime (Android runtime) and system libraries, and a kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message and so on.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may include window managers, content providers, view systems, telephony managers, resource managers, notification managers, and the like.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, take screenshots, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make these data accessible to applications.
  • the data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone book, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. View systems can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • the display interface including the short message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide the communication function of the electronic device. For example, the management of call status (including connecting, hanging up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localization strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files and so on.
  • the notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can disappear automatically after a brief pause without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also display notifications in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of graphs or scroll bar text, such as notifications of applications running in the background, and notifications on the screen in the form of dialog windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a prompt sound is issued, the electronic device vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and a virtual machine. Android runtime is responsible for scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library consists of two parts: one is the function functions that the java language needs to call, and the other is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, safety and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • a system library can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
  • surface manager surface manager
  • media library Media Libraries
  • 3D graphics processing library eg: OpenGL ES
  • 2D graphics engine eg: SGL
  • the Surface Manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides a fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
  • 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, and sensor drivers.
  • a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, etc.). Raw input events are stored at the kernel layer.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon, for example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer.
  • the camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • the present application provides an electronic device.
  • the display method of the device, the execution body of the display method of the electronic device specifically includes two electronic devices, the electronic device can be an electronic device such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, a computer, a smart watch, etc.
  • the device can adjust the display effect of the display module on the electronic device by configuring the display parameters.
  • the above two electronic devices may be electronic devices of the same model and/or type, or may be electronic devices of different models and/or types, that is, the display method of the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable to any two electronic devices. parameter settings.
  • the two electronic devices involved in the embodiments of the present application may be referred to as a first electronic device and a second electronic device, respectively.
  • any electronic device can be set. Therefore, the above-mentioned first electronic device is specifically an electronic device that provides device reference parameters, that is, an electronic device that does not need to adjust display parameters.
  • the second electronic device is specifically the electronic device for setting the display parameters, that is, the electronic device to be adjusted. It should be noted that the above “first” and “second” are only used to distinguish whether the above two electronic devices are electronic devices that need to adjust display parameters. In other scenarios, the second electronic device can also provide device benchmarks.
  • the parameter electronic device, the first electronic device may also be the electronic device that needs to be adjusted.
  • FIG. 4 shows an interactive flowchart of a display method of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application, which is described in detail as follows:
  • the first electronic device sends first hardware parameters and first display parameters about the first electronic device to the second electronic device.
  • a communication connection can be established between the first electronic device and the second electronic device, and the local first hardware parameter and the first display parameter are sent through the established communication connection.
  • the communication connection may be a wired communication connection or a wireless communication connection.
  • the first electronic device is specifically a smartphone
  • the second electronic device is specifically a tablet computer.
  • Wireless communication can be established between the smartphone and the tablet computer through a Bluetooth module, a WiFi communication module, etc.
  • You can also connect to the serial interfaces corresponding to the above two devices through a serial data cable, so as to establish a wired communication connection between the two.
  • the smartphone can A hardware parameter and the first display parameter are sent to the tablet computer.
  • the above two electronic devices may establish a wired communication connection through a serial interface.
  • the first electronic device is a smart phone
  • the smart phone is configured with a Type-C serial interface
  • the second electronic device is a smart TV
  • the smart TV is configured with a high-definition multimedia interface (High Definition Multimedia Interface). Multimedia Interface, HDMI) serial interface.
  • the user can insert the data cable from the Type-C interface to the HDMI interface into the Type-C serial interface of the smartphone, and into the HDMI serial interface of the smart TV, so as to establish wired communication between the above two electronic devices connect.
  • a wireless communication connection may be established between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • a wireless communication module can be configured on the first electronic device and the second electronic device, and the wireless communication module can be a communication module such as a Bluetooth communication module, a WIFI communication module, etc., and the first electronic device and the second electronic device can establish a wireless communication module based on the wireless communication module. communication connection.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a connection based on a wireless local area network provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG.
  • both the first electronic device and the second electronic device are equipped with a WIFI communication module, and both the first electronic device and the second electronic device are connected to the wireless local area network in the current scene, and the wireless local area network can be controlled by a wireless router transmitted wireless signals.
  • a wireless communication connection is established based on the wireless local area network.
  • the first electronic device when the first electronic device sends the device reference parameters to the second electronic device, it needs to be forwarded through the wireless router, that is, the first electronic device encapsulates the device reference parameters to be sent and the network address of the second electronic device is a data packet and sent to the wireless router, and the wireless router forwards the data packet to the second electronic device based on the network address in the data packet.
  • the above-mentioned display method of the electronic device may further include: the first electronic device may respond to the user's connection operation and send a connection instruction to the second electronic device, so that the first electronic device
  • the above communication connection is established with the second electronic device.
  • the above connection operation may be a screen projection operation or a video call operation. If the above-mentioned connection operation is a screen-casting operation, the above-mentioned sent connection instruction may be a screen-casting instruction.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of initiating a screen projection operation provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first electronic device is a smart phone and the second electronic device is a smart TV as an example.
  • an application icon 601 of “device collaboration” may be displayed on the main interface of the smartphone.
  • an executable collaborative operation that is, a collaborative operation
  • the operation interface is shown in (b) of Figure 6.
  • the collaborative operation interface includes various types of collaborative operations, including: screen projection 602, remote control 603, data backup 604, and so on.
  • the smartphone can generate a corresponding optional device list in response to the user's click operation on the screen projection 602 , as shown in (c) of FIG. 6 .
  • the method of generating the optional device list may be as follows: the smart phone may send an online device acquisition request to the network device of the connected local area network, and the network device may, in response to the received online device acquisition request, acquire all the devices currently connected to the local area network. Device identification of electronic equipment and feedback to smartphone. The smart phone can receive the device identification fed back by the network device and generate the above-mentioned optional device list.
  • the smart phone can respond to the user's selection operation based on the feedback from the above-mentioned optional device list, and determine the device selected by the smart phone for screen projection based on the device identifier corresponding to the selection operation. Establish a communication connection for screencasting.
  • the first electronic device is preset with a default screen projection electronic device, when the first electronic device receives a screen projection operation initiated by the user, it can directly communicate with the default screen projection electronic device (for example, the second electronic device) Establish a communication connection for screen projection without the need for manual selection by the user.
  • the smartphone can send the screen projection instruction to the second electronic device.
  • the operation of S401 can be performed, that is, the smart phone sends the hardware parameters and display parameters about the phone to the smart TV.
  • the above-mentioned device that initiates the screen projection operation may also be a second electronic device, and the specific connection process is the same as that of the first electronic device to initiate the screen projection operation. Please refer to the above description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the smart TV ie, the second electronic device
  • receives the screen projection instruction sent by the smart phone ie, the first electronic device
  • the confirmation prompt message includes a control 605 for confirming screen projection and a control 606 for rejecting screen projection.
  • the smart TV can establish a communication connection with the smartphone in response to the above-mentioned projection instruction; If the operation is selected (ie, reject the screen projection operation), there is no need to respond to the above screen projection command, and no communication connection with the smartphone will be established.
  • the smartphone and the smart TV can send the data content to be projected to the smart TV through the above communication connection, so as to realize the communication between the smartphone and the smart TV.
  • the smart TV simultaneously displays the specified data content, as shown in (e) of FIG. 6 .
  • the smart TV can maintain the original display parameters to display the data content of the projected screen, that is, the smart phone does not send the first hardware parameters and the first display parameters to the smart TV, and the smart TV does not adjust the local display parameters.
  • a control 607 for synchronization of display effects may be displayed on the smartphone.
  • the smart phone detects that the user clicks the above control 607, it means that the user needs to unify the display effect between the smart phone and the smart TV, that is, in response to the display effect synchronization operation initiated by the user, the first electronic device sends the device reference parameters to the second electronic device.
  • Electronic equipment By configuring the above controls for synchronization of display effects, it is possible to select whether synchronization of display effects is required according to the usage requirements, which realizes personalized device management, and avoids the inability to determine whether synchronization is required according to the scene every time multiple devices cooperate to display the same data content. Display effect, thus improving the flexibility of display effect synchronization.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of an operation of initiating a video call provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first electronic device is a smartphone and the second electronic device is a tablet computer as an example. illustrate.
  • a communication application program may be installed on the smartphone, and after the communication application program is started, a communication operation interface may be displayed, and the communication operation interface includes a list of communication objects, and the communication object list includes Multiple communicable objects.
  • the smartphone can respond to the selection operation initiated by the user, determine the target object to be communicated with, and generate a chat interface corresponding to the target object, as shown in (b) of FIG. 7 .
  • the chat interface includes multiple optional operation controls, such as a control 901 for sending images, a control 902 for sending expressions, and a control 903 for video chatting.
  • a control 901 for sending images
  • a control 902 for sending expressions
  • a control 903 for video chatting.
  • the smartphone receives the click operation on the control 903 initiated by the user (that is, the initiation operation of the video call), it can send a call connection request to the electronic device corresponding to the target object, and display the call link waiting interface, as shown in Figure 7 ( c), in this embodiment, the electronic device corresponding to the target object is the second electronic device, that is, a tablet computer.
  • the method of sending the above call connection request from the smartphone to the tablet computer may specifically be as follows: the smartphone sends the call connection request to the cloud server, where the call connection request includes the object identifier of the target object, and the cloud server can determine the login according to the object identifier.
  • the communication address of the electronic device of the target object and forward the above communication connection request to the electronic device associated with the communication address, that is, the tablet computer.
  • the tablet computer may display a connection prompt interface, and the connection prompt interface includes a control 904 for connecting a call and a control 905 for rejecting the call.
  • the tablet computer receives the control 904 that the user clicks to connect to the call, it can feed back a call confirmation command to the smartphone, establish a communication connection with the smartphone, and make a video call, as shown in (d) in FIG. 7 . If the communication connection between the smartphone and the tablet is established, the operation of S401 can be performed, that is, the smartphone sends the hardware parameters of the phone and the display parameters of the phone to the tablet, thereby starting the synchronization of the display effect between the smartphone and the tablet. process.
  • the tablet computer receives the user's click on the control 905 for rejecting the call, it means that it does not make a video call with the smartphone, and it refuses to respond to the above connection request, that is, it does not make a video call. At this time, there is no need to synchronize the display between the two electronic devices.
  • the control 905 for rejecting the call when it is determined that there is no need to establish collaborative display among multiple devices, it is not necessary to reset the display parameters of either party's electronic device, thereby avoiding invalid display parameter setting operations.
  • the above-mentioned device for initiating a video call operation may also be a second electronic device, and the specific connection process is the same as that for initiating a video call operation by the first electronic device.
  • the smartphone and the tablet computer can send the video call picture to the tablet computer through the above communication connection.
  • the tablet computer can also send the The locally collected video call picture is sent to the smartphone through the above-mentioned communication connection, as shown in (d) of FIG. 7 .
  • the tablet computer can maintain the original display parameters to display the screen of the received video call, that is, the smartphone does not send the hardware parameters and display parameters of the mobile phone to the tablet computer, and the tablet computer does not adjust the display parameters.
  • the smartphone and/or tablet may have controls for display synchronization.
  • the smartphone and/or tablet detects that the user clicks the above controls, it means that the user needs to unify the display effect between the smartphone and the tablet, that is, in response to the user-initiated display effect synchronization operation, the smartphone sends the device benchmark parameters to tablet.
  • the first electronic device stores parameters related to the display effect of the first electronic device, that is, the above-mentioned device reference parameters, and sends the device reference parameters to the second electronic device through a communication connection established with the second electronic device device, so that the second electronic device can adjust the second display parameter based on the device reference parameter, so as to keep the display effect consistent between the two electronic devices.
  • the above-mentioned first display parameter is specifically a dynamic parameter, that is, in different usage scenarios, the obtained first display parameter may be different, for example, the display brightness of the current display module of the first electronic device, according to user settings or scene light intensity.
  • Dynamic adjustment in this case, the first electronic device needs to obtain the first display parameter corresponding to the current moment when the display effect needs to be synchronized with the second electronic device, and send the first display parameter corresponding to the current moment to the second electronic device.
  • Electronic equipment in this case, the first electronic device needs to obtain the first display parameter corresponding to the current moment when the display effect needs to be synchronized with the second electronic device, and send the first display parameter corresponding to the current moment to the second electronic device.
  • the first hardware parameter is specifically: a parameter related to the device performance of the first electronic device itself, such as device hardware information, system information, usage time, etc. of the first electronic device.
  • the device hardware information may specifically include the hardware model, module size, screen resolution, screen material, etc. of the display module; the system information may include the operating system type, operating system version number, and the like.
  • the screen material includes, but is not limited to, a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD) screen, an organic electro-optical laser display (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED) screen, and the like.
  • the above-mentioned first display parameter may be a dynamic parameter, which can be adjusted by the electronic device by means of software setting, that is, in different usage scenarios, the obtained first display parameter may be different, such as the first display parameter.
  • the display brightness of the current display module of the electronic device is dynamically adjusted according to the user's settings or the light intensity of the scene. In this case, the first electronic device needs to obtain the first electronic device corresponding to the current moment when the display effect needs to be synchronized with the second electronic device Display parameters, and send the first display parameters corresponding to the current moment to the second electronic device.
  • the first display parameter is specifically a parameter related to the display configuration of the display module of the first electronic device, such as screen brightness, color gamut range, sharpness sharpen, three-dimensional lookup table (3D Look UP Table, 3D LUT), white point information.
  • the white point information specifically refers to: the whitest point displayed in the display module, that is, the color when the display module displays 255, 255, 255 white, which is usually represented by color coordinates xy or color temperature K.
  • first hardware parameter and the first display parameter may include several items of the above-mentioned two types of parameters, which are specifically determined according to the usage scenario, and the number of parameter items included in the device benchmark parameters is not limited here. .
  • the first electronic device may encapsulate the above-mentioned first hardware parameter and the first display parameter into the same data packet, and send the above-mentioned two types of parameters to the second electronic device together.
  • the second electronic device determines a second display parameter according to a second hardware parameter of the second electronic device, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter.
  • the second electronic device after receiving the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter fed back by the first electronic device, the second electronic device can use the local second hardware parameter of the second electronic device and the first electronic device of the opposite end of the communication The first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device are determined to determine the local second display parameter of the second electronic device, so as to ensure the same display effect between the two different electronic devices.
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter
  • the first is a way of direct determination
  • the other is a way of adjusting the original third display parameter of the second electronic device. The specific description is as follows:
  • the first method is specifically: the second electronic device searches the preset comparison parameter relationship table for the preset matching with the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter. Set parameters, and use the preset parameters as the second display parameters.
  • the second electronic device may store a comparison parameter relationship table, in which the conversion relationship of display parameters between different electronic devices is pre-recorded, and the second electronic device may, according to the second hardware parameter of the machine, As well as the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the first electronic device, by searching the above-mentioned comparison table, the second display parameter that can ensure the same display effect between the first electronic device and the second electronic device can be obtained.
  • the above-mentioned comparison table may be stored in the local memory of the second electronic device, or may be stored in the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device can communicate with the cloud server to send the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the first electronic device to the cloud server , the cloud server may query the above-mentioned comparison parameter relationship table, and determine to obtain the corresponding second display parameter.
  • Table 1 shows a comparison parameter relationship table provided by an embodiment of the present application. For example, if the device model corresponding to the first electronic device is device A, and the device model corresponding to the second electronic device is device B, if the brightness value (ie, the first display parameter) corresponding to the first electronic device is 80, the second By looking up the above comparison table, the electronic device can directly obtain that if the display effect between the first electronic device and the second electronic device needs to be kept consistent, the brightness value of the second electronic device needs to be set to 90.
  • the brightness value ie, the first display parameter
  • the adjustment of the original third display parameter of the second electronic device may specifically include the following two steps:
  • Step 1 The second electronic device generates display correction parameters based on the first hardware parameters, the first display parameters and the second hardware parameters.
  • Step 2 The second electronic device adjusts the third display parameter of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter to obtain the second display parameter.
  • the above-mentioned third display parameter is specifically the original display parameter of the second electronic device before adjustment.
  • the second electronic device may store a correction parameter table, where different first hardware parameters and correction parameters associated with the second hardware parameters are stored in the correction parameter table.
  • the second electronic device can inquire the correction parameters used to adjust the display effect difference caused by the difference between the second hardware parameter and the first hardware parameter in the above-mentioned correction parameter table, and use the obtained correction parameter as the correction parameter used to adjust the third hardware parameter.
  • the third display parameter may include multiple different parameter items, and different parameter items may be associated with corresponding correction parameter tables; of course, one correction parameter table may be used to determine multiple parameter items or all of the third display parameters Parameter item, and the format and form of the above correction parameter table are not limited here.
  • Table 2 shows a correction parameter table provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the correction parameter table is specifically used to correct the parameter item of brightness value in the second display parameter of the second electronic device.
  • the first hardware parameter fed back by the first electronic device contains two parameter items, which are the device model (A model) and the version number (2.0.1) of the first electronic device, and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device
  • the display parameters include the brightness value (60) of the display module of the current first electronic device, then the display correction parameters corresponding to the second electronic device can be determined by querying the following query relationship table, and the display correction parameters are specifically used for correcting the first electronic device.
  • the correction coefficient of the luminance value of the display module of the second electronic device, the specific value is 0.86.
  • the second electronic device may also store a correction conversion function, and the second electronic device may import the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the first electronic device into the above correction conversion function,
  • the display correction parameter for adjusting the third display parameter is calculated.
  • the correction conversion function may be a function obtained by training and learning a neural network based on multiple sets of training samples, and the correction conversion function may be a multi-layer convolutional neural network CNN, a recurrent neural network RNN, a long-term and short-term LSTM neural network, etc. .
  • the training samples used for training and learning the neural network specifically include multiple sets of benchmark training parameters for training and their corresponding training correction parameters, and the learning parameters contained in the neural network can be trained and learned by means of big data training and learning. , so that the corresponding relationship between the device reference parameters and the display correction parameters can be accurately obtained, so that the accuracy of generating the above display correction parameters can be improved.
  • the above correction conversion function may be specifically used to calculate display correction parameters between different electronic devices.
  • the second electronic device in addition to importing the device reference parameters of the first electronic device into the calibration conversion function, the second electronic device may perform the learning parameters in the calibration conversion function based on the second hardware parameters of the second electronic device.
  • the first hardware parameter of the first electronic device, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device can be imported into the above-mentioned correction conversion function at the same time, so as to obtain the above-mentioned display correction parameter by calculation.
  • the above-mentioned calibration conversion function and calibration parameter table can be used to determine display calibration parameters between different electronic devices of the same device manufacturer, and can also be used to determine display calibration parameters between different electronic devices of different device manufacturers.
  • the above-mentioned correction conversion function and correction parameter table can be updated regularly. For example, when a new type of electronic equipment appears on the market, a correction parameter table associated with the new type of electronic equipment can be generated, or the information about the electronic equipment of the new signal can be collected. training samples, and the above-mentioned correction conversion function is trained based on the training samples, so as to adjust the learning parameters in the correction conversion function, so that the correction conversion function can be compatible with new models of electronic equipment.
  • the second electronic device after determining the display correction parameters, can reconfigure the local third display parameters according to the display correction parameters, so as to obtain the second display parameters, and the second electronic device can obtain the second display parameters based on the second display parameters.
  • the parameters are displayed, so that when the same display object is displayed, the display effect of the first electronic device is consistent with the display effect of the second electronic device.
  • the display correction parameter includes parameter values corresponding to a plurality of different parameter items, for example, a brightness value, a sharpness value, a saturation value, etc. are specifically defined.
  • the second electronic device The parameter value of the associated parameter item in the display correction parameter can be assigned to the corresponding parameter item in the local third display parameter, for example, the brightness value defined in the display correction parameter is used as the brightness value in the adjusted second display parameter.
  • the display correction parameter may include adjustment ratios corresponding to several parameter items, for example, the adjustment ratio for the brightness value is 120%.
  • the second electronic device may adjust the adjustment ratio according to the above adjustment ratio
  • the parameter item associated with the third display parameter is adjusted. For example, the brightness value of the second electronic device is 80, and the adjustment ratio is 120%, then the adjusted brightness value of the second display parameter is 96.
  • the above-mentioned display correction parameter further includes a first display parameter
  • the second electronic device can calculate the adjusted second display parameter according to the first display parameter and the corresponding adjustment ratio.
  • the overall display effect of the second electronic device is dark, so the adjustment ratio for the brightness value is 120%.
  • the above display correction parameter may include the brightness value of the first electronic device. For example, if the brightness value is 80, if the second electronic device sets the brightness value to 80, since the overall brightness of the second electronic device is dark, when the brightness value is 80, the screen brightness will still be darker than that of the first electronic device. brightness. Based on this, the second electronic device needs to adjust the brightness value to the same basis as the brightness value of the first electronic device, and then superimpose the above adjustment ratio, that is, configure the brightness value to 96, in order to keep the screen brightness of the two electronic devices consistent.
  • FIGS. 8 a to 8 c show schematic diagrams of adjusting the color gamut in the second display parameter provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram of the color gamut of the second electronic device before the color gamut adjustment.
  • the color gamut before the adjustment of the second electronic device is referred to as the first color gamut, and the first color gamut can be depicted in the preset
  • the color coordinate system can be based on the color coordinate system formulated by the International Commission on Illumination (Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage, CIE).
  • the abscissa represents the red component
  • the ordinate represents the red component
  • the green component and since all components are normalized, the sum of the red component, the green component and the blue component is 1, so based on the xy coordinates, the values corresponding to the three primary colors can be obtained, thus uniquely determining a color.
  • a triangle is included in the color coordinate system, and the three vertices R, G and B in the triangle are coordinate points corresponding to the reference red, reference green and reference blue, respectively. Based on the above three reference colors, the third reference color can be determined.
  • the color gamut corresponding to the second electronic device Among them, the point W in the triangle area represents the pixel value corresponding to the white pixel in the color gamut coordinates.
  • arc passing through the point W specifically represents the change corresponding to the white point as the color temperature changes.
  • the coordinates of the reference blue of the second electronic device in the color gamut coordinate system are (0.18, 0.09)
  • the coordinates of the reference green are (0.2, 0.65)
  • the coordinates of the reference red are (0.62, 0.32).
  • Fig. 8b is a schematic diagram of the color gamut of the first electronic device.
  • the color gamut of the first electronic device will be referred to as the second color gamut.
  • the reference blue of the first electronic device is in the color gamut coordinate system.
  • the coordinates of the reference green are (0.18, 0.11), the coordinates of the reference green are (0.22, 0.66), and the coordinates of the reference red are (0.61, 0.3). It can be seen that before the adjustment of the first electronic device and the second electronic device, the color There are differences in the domains, and correspondingly, there are certain deviations between the white point coordinates.
  • the second electronic device can adjust the first color gamut of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter (the display correction parameter can record the coordinate values of the three primary colors), so as to obtain the adjusted color gamut, that is, the third color gamut, As shown in Figure 8c.
  • the second electronic device displays the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content and the first display effect of the first electronic device.
  • the second display effect of the electronic device displaying the data content is consistent.
  • the display effects of the two will be the same, thus solving the problem of the current situation. There is a problem that the display effect is inconsistent due to different hardware devices between devices.
  • the first electronic device may send the data content to be displayed to the second electronic device, and after receiving the data content, the second electronic device may correspond to the data content according to the local display module
  • the second image (that is, the image displayed on the second electronic device) is obtained by preprocessing the first electronic device.
  • the first electronic device can also perform corresponding preprocessing on the data content to obtain the first image, so that the data content can be displayed in the second electronic device.
  • the above-mentioned preprocessing may include adjusting the display scale, resolution, etc. of the source data.
  • the above-mentioned data content is specifically screen projection data
  • the first electronic device sends the screen projection data to the second electronic device
  • the second electronic device can pass the preset screen projection protocol and the current screen projection data.
  • the screen projection settings (such as resolution and frame rate), etc., are processed on the screen projection data to obtain image data that can be displayed on the second electronic device, that is, the second image.
  • the second electronic device may also send the data content to be displayed to the first electronic device, and the specific implementation process can refer to the above description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the data content of the second image to be displayed by the second electronic device can be obtained through the Internet or an external memory, and correspondingly, the first electronic device can also obtain the first image through the Internet and an external memory data content.
  • the first image is the second image
  • the data content corresponding to the first image and the second image are the same image data.
  • the above-mentioned display effect is not the same as the display parameters of the electronic device, and the display effect is specifically based on the hardware device of the electronic device and the set display parameters. Includes: Contrast, Dynamic Range, Color Gamut, Brightness and Sharpness. Taking the brightness as an example to illustrate, the electronic device can adjust its own brightness within a preset range, for example, display it at 50% brightness, while the actual screen of the electronic device emits light corresponding to nits (nit, one cubic meter). In addition to being related to the brightness value set above, it is also related to the material of the display module used by the electronic device, that is, the value set by the electronic device to the brightness value in the display parameters is not the value of the electronic device.
  • the brightness actually displayed by the display module taking the color temperature as an example, the electronic device can be configured with a corresponding color temperature adjustment range, and the color temperature of the screen output can be adjusted within the preset color temperature adjustment range, and the actual screen output of the electronic device corresponds to
  • the Kelvin temperature (K) is also not only related to the color temperature set above, but also related to the degree of color shift of the display module of the electronic device. Based on this, another parameter different from the display parameter is introduced here, that is, the display effect.
  • the brightness nit in the display effect is taken as an example for description.
  • the screen brightness of the first electronic device is dark, and the screen brightness of the second electronic device is bright.
  • both the first electronic device and the second electronic device set the backlight brightness to 80% (that is, the first electronic device
  • the brightness in the first display parameter and the third display parameter are both 80%)
  • the brightness of the first electronic device measured by the brightness measuring instrument is 700nit
  • the brightness of the second electronic device is 700 nits.
  • the brightness is 850nit.
  • the display parameters (that is, the backlight brightness) of the two are the same, the actual measured luminous brightness of the screen is not the same (that is, the display effect is inconsistent).
  • the second electronic device needs to be lowered.
  • the backlight brightness of the second electronic device is reduced from 80% to 72%.
  • the second display parameter of the second electronic device that is, the backlight brightness of the second electronic device
  • One display parameter (that is, the backlight brightness of the first electronic device) is inconsistent, but the brightness of the two screens is measured by a brightness measuring instrument, and the corresponding measured values are both 700nit, that is, the first display effect is consistent with the second display effect. , thereby confirming that the display effects of the two electronic devices are consistent.
  • FIGS. 9 a to 9 c are schematic diagrams showing the comparison of the contrast ratios in the display effects provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • 9a is a schematic diagram of a display effect of the second electronic device on an image before adjustment
  • FIG. 9b is a schematic diagram of a display effect of the same image by the first electronic device. Comparing the above two schematic diagrams, it can be seen that when the two display the same image, there will be a certain difference in the display effects of the two electronic devices.
  • the second electronic device displays the image
  • the shadow area of the screen is darker and the contrast is higher
  • the first electronic device displays the image
  • the shadow area of the screen is lighter, and the overall contrast is compared with that of the second electronic device. lower.
  • the second electronic device can determine the second display parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter, and the second hardware parameter, and redisplay the above image based on the second display parameter.
  • FIG. 9c shows the second electronic device A schematic diagram of the display effect of the device on the same image based on the second display parameter. Comparing Figure 9c and Figure 9b, it can be seen that when the adjusted second electronic device displays the same image as the first electronic device, the display effect is consistent.
  • the second electronic device adjusts the second display parameter to be adjusted based on the display correction parameter, obtains the adjusted second display parameter, and displays it according to the adjusted second display parameter, it can be It is ensured that the display effects of the first electronic device and the second electronic device are consistent. On this basis, the first electronic device and the second electronic device do not necessarily need to obtain specific values of the first display effect and the second display effect.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first definition.
  • the second display effect includes At least one of the following: a second contrast ratio, a second dynamic range, a second color gamut, a second brightness, and a second clarity; and the consistent display effect between the two electronic devices specifically means that the values of the corresponding dimensions are relatively close, At this time, it can be considered that the display effects between the two electronic devices are consistent.
  • the above-mentioned first display effect specifically refers to the corresponding display effect when the first electronic device uses the first display parameter to display data content
  • the above-mentioned second display effect specifically refers to the second electronic device using the second display effect to display the corresponding display effect.
  • the first display effect of the above-mentioned two electronic devices displaying the data content is consistent with the second display effect of the first electronic device displaying the data content, which may specifically include at least one of the following:
  • the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast is smaller than a preset first threshold; that is, when the first electronic device and the second electronic device both display the same data content, the difference in contrast between the two will be less than the preset first threshold.
  • the difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range is smaller than a preset second threshold; that is, when the first electronic device and the second electronic device both display the same data content, the dynamic range between the two The difference will be smaller than the preset second threshold.
  • the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut is smaller than a preset third threshold; that is, when the first electronic device and the second electronic device both display the same data content, the color gamut between the two The difference between the colors in the , will be smaller than the preset third threshold.
  • the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness is smaller than the preset fourth threshold; that is, when the first electronic device and the second electronic device both display the same data content, the difference in brightness between the two will be less than the preset fourth threshold.
  • the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is less than the preset fifth threshold; that is, when the first electronic device and the second electronic device both display the same data content, the The difference between the sharpness scores will be less than the preset fifth threshold.
  • the consistent display effect specifically means that the parameter items corresponding to the display effects of the two electronic devices are close within a certain floating range (ie, the difference is not greater than a preset threshold).
  • the first threshold value, the second threshold value, the third threshold value, the fourth threshold value and the fifth threshold value are all 0.
  • the sharpness is a relatively subjective parameter, it can be measured objectively by the sharpness score.
  • the sharpness score may be determined by displaying a preset sample image, and determining the sharpness of the electronic device according to the number of lines in the sample image that can be observed.
  • the above-mentioned display effect may also include color
  • the color of a certain pixel of the first image may also be displayed by the first electronic device.
  • the second electronic device displays the difference between the second colors of the pixels corresponding to the second image, and determines the color difference between the two electronic devices, if the color difference is smaller than the preset sixth threshold, and the difference between the above-mentioned multiple dimensions If the difference is smaller than the preset threshold, it is recognized that the display effects of the two electronic devices are consistent.
  • the display method of an electronic device can send the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the first electronic device to the second electronic device that needs to synchronize the display effect.
  • the electronic device can determine the second display parameter of the second electronic device according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device itself, and the second display parameter determined based on the above three parameters can be eliminated.
  • the display effect is affected by different hardware devices between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device can display the data content according to the second display parameters, so as to ensure the first electronic device.
  • the display effects corresponding to the same content between one electronic device and the second electronic device are kept consistent, which avoids deviations in the display effects when displaying the same data content due to differences in hardware modules or different display settings, and improves the display parameter settings. accuracy.
  • one of the electronic devices can also determine the local display parameters according to the hardware parameters fed back by the other electronic device and the display parameters of the opposite end.
  • the setting process is performed automatically by the device, which is insensitive to the user, and does not require the user to manually configure the display parameters and frequently manually adjust the electronic equipment of the device, thereby improving the efficiency of parameter setting and the user experience.
  • FIG. 10 shows an interaction flowchart of a display method of an electronic device provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the device reference parameter specifically includes the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the first electronic device, and the first electronic device sends the above two parameters respectively.
  • the display method of the above-mentioned electronic device specifically includes S1001 to S1005, and the details are as follows:
  • the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the device reference parameter to be sent by the first electronic device specifically includes two types of parameters, which are the above-mentioned first hardware parameter and the first display parameter.
  • the above two types of parameters are sent twice separately in this embodiment.
  • the first electronic device needs to cooperate with the second electronic device, for example, in response to a user-initiated screen projection operation, a video call operation, or a display effect synchronous configuration operation, etc.
  • the first electronic device can connect to the first hardware device through the established communication connection.
  • the parameters are sent to the second electronic device.
  • the first hardware parameter may include multiple parameter items, such as: material of the display module, screen manufacturer, screen size, resolution, refresh rate, device system type, device system version and other parameter items . Since the first hardware parameter is generally a relatively fixed parameter, such as parameter items related to the screen, such as screen manufacturer, screen size and resolution, etc., the first electronic device can store the above-mentioned first hardware parameter in a readable register associated with In the storage area, the first electronic device can read the data in the associated storage area in the readable register, thereby obtaining the first hardware parameter, and sending the first hardware parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the first hardware parameter is generally a relatively fixed parameter, such as parameter items related to the screen, such as screen manufacturer, screen size and resolution, etc.
  • the first electronic device can store the above-mentioned first hardware parameter in a readable register associated with In the storage area, the first electronic device can read the data in the associated storage area in the readable register, thereby obtaining the first hardware parameter, and sending the first hardware parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device may generate the difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter locally corresponding to the second electronic device, wherein the The difference correction parameter is used to correct the difference in display effect between the first electronic device and the second electronic device due to the difference between the devices.
  • the second electronic device can determine the screen material of the first electronic device according to the first hardware parameter fed back by the first electronic device, and when it is determined that it is inconsistent with the screen material of the local device, it can be used to adjust the screen material caused by the screen difference. Displays disparity correction parameters with inconsistent effects.
  • the second electronic device may store a device calibration parameter table used for the difference correction parameters corresponding to different device parameters, and the second electronic device may query the above device calibration parameter table to determine the difference between the device and the first electronic device.
  • Table 3 shows a device calibration parameter table provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device parameters of the device calibration parameter table include multiple parameter items, namely device model, screen material and system type.
  • the number of parameter items included in the device calibration parameter item can be More or less can be determined according to actual usage. For example, if the first hardware parameter fed back by the first electronic device is (A model, material 1, 1.0.1), the above-mentioned difference correction parameter is (0.88-0.92) by querying.
  • the second electronic device may store a difference correction conversion function for calculating the difference correction parameters between parameters of different devices.
  • the second electronic device may import the first hardware parameters of the first electronic device (or the first hardware parameters of the first electronic device and the second hardware parameters of the second electronic device) into the above-mentioned difference correction conversion function, so as to calculate the corresponding difference correction parameters.
  • the foregoing manners for determining the difference correction parameter include two manners, namely, an online manner and an offline manner.
  • the specific description is as follows:
  • Method 1 Determine the difference correction parameters based on the online method.
  • S1002 in the embodiment of the present application specifically includes the following two steps (step 1 and step 2 respectively), which are specifically described as follows:
  • Step 1 the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameter and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device to a cloud server.
  • the second electronic device may establish a communication connection with the cloud server, and obtain the above-mentioned difference correction parameters through the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device needs to have the ability to communicate with the Internet, and the second electronic device can access the mobile communication network through the built-in mobile communication module, or can access the mobile communication network in the scene through the built-in wireless communication module.
  • the network device is connected to the Internet through the network device.
  • the second electronic device is configured with a wired communication port, it can also be connected to the routing device through the wired communication port, and connected to the Internet through the routing device. /or the mobile communication network establishes a communication connection with the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device can also obtain the device parameters related to the display effect in the machine, that is, the above-mentioned second hardware parameters.
  • the second hardware parameters can also include the following One or more combinations of parameter items: material of the display module, screen manufacturer, screen size, resolution, refresh rate, device system type, device system version, etc.
  • the manner in which the second electronic device acquires the second hardware parameter is the same as the manner in which the first electronic device acquires the first hardware parameter, and details are not described herein again.
  • the second electronic device may obtain the communication address of the cloud server when receiving the user's collaborative operation (such as the above-mentioned screen projection operation, video call operation, or display effect synchronization operation), and based on the above
  • the communication address sends a login request to the cloud server, and the login request may carry the authentication information of the second electronic device (for example, the program identification code of the application installed on the second electronic device may also be the account of the user account associated with the second electronic device).
  • the cloud server can perform identity authentication on the second electronic device based on the above-mentioned authentication information, and if the authentication is passed, it will feed back a login success message to the second electronic device.
  • the first hardware parameters received from the first electronic device and the second hardware parameters of the local machine can be encapsulated into a data packet and sent to the cloud server together.
  • Step 2 the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the cloud server may generate a difference correction parameter for correcting the difference in display effect caused by the difference in the parameters of the two devices. Specifically, the cloud server will identify the first hardware parameter as the reference parameter, and the second hardware parameter as the target parameter, that is, the conversion relationship is that the second hardware parameter points to the first hardware parameter, so as to change the display effect of the second electronic device Correcting to the same display effect corresponding to the first hardware parameter, the above-mentioned difference correction parameter is obtained.
  • the cloud server may store a device correction parameter table for determining the difference correction parameters between different electronic devices.
  • the cloud server may search the device calibration parameter table for a list unit that matches the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter sent by the second electronic device, and use the parameter value recorded in the list unit as the above-mentioned difference correction parameter.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of determining a difference correction parameter from a cloud server-based device correction parameter table provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the difference correction parameter table includes the target device model, the reference device model, the screen material, the refresh frequency, and the resolution.
  • the parameter items of different device parameters can be used to correct different display parameters. Therefore, The parameter items of different device parameters can be associated with corresponding difference correction parameters.
  • the resolution can be used to correct the sharpness in the display parameters
  • the refresh frequency can be used to correct the relevant parameters in the frame interpolation algorithm
  • the screen material can be used to correct the display parameters. Correct the related parameters in the color algorithm, and the maximum brightness is used to correct the related parameters of high dynamic lighting rendering HDR, etc.
  • the above-determined difference correction parameter may be a parameter range, or multiple candidate values, which need to be further determined based on the first display parameter of the subsequent first electronic device.
  • the device model of the second electronic device is model A
  • the screen material of the second electronic device is material 1
  • the refresh frequency is frequency 2
  • the resolution is 1
  • the second electronic device is calibrated in the above-mentioned device.
  • the corresponding area in the parameter table, and according to the first hardware parameter of the first electronic device the associated difference correction parameter is determined from the corresponding area.
  • the first hardware parameter of the first electronic device is (C model, material 1, frequency 2, resolution 2)
  • parameter 2 can be obtained as the difference correction parameter obtained by this search.
  • the cloud server may also store a conversion function for determining the difference correction parameters between different electronic devices, and the conversion function may be obtained after training the neural network through a large amount of training data.
  • the above training data includes training reference device parameters, training target device parameters, and training correction parameters.
  • the cloud server can train the native neural network based on the above three types of parameters until the loss corresponding to the above neural network meets the preset loss threshold. , it is recognized that the neural network has been trained, and the trained neural network is recognized as the above-mentioned conversion function.
  • the cloud server can import the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter uploaded by the second electronic device into the above conversion function, then the corresponding difference correction parameter can be calculated and fed back to the second electronic device.
  • the cloud server after the cloud server calculates and obtains the difference correction parameter for eliminating the display effect inconsistency caused by the difference between the first electronic device and the second electronic device, the cloud server can A communication connection is used to feed back the difference correction parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device may be configured with a preset effective waiting time. After sending the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter to the cloud server, the second electronic device may start the waiting timer. If the count value of the waiting timer is greater than the above-mentioned effective waiting time and the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server is not received, the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter can be re-sent to the cloud server, so that the cloud server can recalculate the difference correction parameter.
  • the cloud server cannot generate the difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter, the cloud server cannot feed back the difference correction parameter within the effective waiting time, and at this time, the cloud server can feedback to the second electronic device.
  • the difference correction parameter may not be fed back to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device receives the conversion failure information or does not receive the discrepancy correction parameter within the effective waiting period, it can output parameter setting failure information so that the user can reselect other electronic devices to synchronize display effects.
  • the difference correction parameter received by the second electronic device may be a difference correction table, and the difference correction table records that when the first electronic device displays with different first display parameters, the first 2.
  • Table 4 shows a difference correction table provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Table 4, the difference correction table is specifically used to adjust the sharpness value in the second display parameter of the second electronic device, because the second electronic device only receives the first hardware parameter of the first electronic device, and the display The first display parameter related to the module setting has not been received, so the sharpness of the first electronic device is to be determined.
  • the above difference correction table needs to be able to query the first electronic device under different sharpness,
  • the sharpness value that the electronic device needs to set For example, if the sharpness of the first electronic device is 0.3, the sharpness that needs to be set for the second electronic device is 0.38 to ensure consistent display effects between the two electronic devices.
  • the second electronic device can upload the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter to the cloud server, and the cloud server can calculate the corresponding difference correction parameters, so that the second electronic device does not need to undertake the calculation of the difference correction parameters.
  • the function reduces the calculation pressure of the second electronic device, and the cloud server often has strong computing power, which can improve the accuracy of the difference correction parameter calculation, reduce the calculation time, and improve the accuracy of the display effect correction.
  • the second electronic device does not need to store relevant data for generating the difference correction parameter, so that the storage pressure of the second electronic device can be reduced.
  • Method 2 Determine the difference correction parameter based on an offline method.
  • S1002 in this embodiment of the present application specifically includes the following four steps (steps 1 to 4 respectively), which are specifically described as follows:
  • Step 1 the second electronic device searches an offline database for a calibration parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device may store an offline database, and the offline database includes calibration parameter packages corresponding to different electronic devices.
  • the calibration parameter package is specifically used to set the second display parameters of the second electronic device to When the image is displayed based on the set second display parameters, the display effect of the second electronic device is consistent with the display effect of the electronic device corresponding to the calibration parameter package.
  • the second electronic device is specifically a Mate40
  • the electronic device corresponding to a certain calibration parameter package is a P40
  • the image is adjusted based on the set second display parameters.
  • the display effect of Mate40 will be the same as that of P40. Based on this, each calibration parameter package stored in the offline database will be associated with corresponding device parameters.
  • the second electronic device may query whether there is a correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter from the above-mentioned offline database. If the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is stored in the offline database, the operation of S1302 is performed; otherwise, if the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is not stored in the offline database, the operation of S1303 is performed.
  • each calibration parameter package may be associated with one or several parameter items in the device parameters
  • the calibration parameter package may be associated with the device model, that is, different device models are associated with corresponding calibration parameter packages.
  • the second electronic device can determine the device model corresponding to the first electronic device (that is, the parameter value of a specific parameter item) from the first hardware parameters, and determine whether there is a device model corresponding to the first electronic device in the offline database Corresponding calibration parameter package. If the device model corresponding to a certain calibration parameter package is the same as the device model of the first electronic device, it is recognized that the calibration parameter package matches the first hardware parameter.
  • the calibration parameter package is associated with multiple parameter items in the device parameters, it is necessary to determine whether the corresponding multiple parameter items in the first electronic device are the same as each parameter item in the calibration parameter package.
  • the calibration parameter package matches the first hardware parameter; if any parameter item of the first hardware parameter is different from the parameter item associated with the calibration parameter package, it is identified that the first hardware parameter does not match the calibration parameter package.
  • a difference correction table may be stored in the above-mentioned correction parameter package, so that corresponding difference correction parameters can be determined by querying the above-mentioned difference correction table;
  • a conversion function may also be stored in the correction parameter package, so that the second The electronic device can calculate the corresponding difference correction parameters by importing the device parameters into the above conversion function.
  • Step 2 the second electronic device extracts the difference correction parameter associated with the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device from the correction parameter package.
  • the second electronic device finds a correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter from the offline database, the above-mentioned difference correction parameters can be extracted from the correction parameter package.
  • the difference correction parameter For the form of the difference correction parameter, reference may be made to the relevant description of the previous embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • all correction parameter packages stored in the offline database of the second electronic device are used to set display parameters of the second electronic device, that is, each correction parameter package is only used for The second display parameter is set, but is not applicable to the setting of the display parameters of other electronic devices except the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device can obtain the difference correction parameter based on each correction parameter included in the correction parameter package, without extracting the parameter associated with the second hardware parameter from the correction parameter package.
  • the correction data package contains difference correction parameters for setting display parameters of different types of electronic devices, that is, the correction data package is suitable for setting the display effects of all electronic devices to the same
  • the display effects corresponding to the first hardware parameters are consistent.
  • the device model of the first electronic device is A model
  • the second electronic device can obtain a correction data package corresponding to the A model from the offline database, and the correction data package can be used to display different electronic devices.
  • the effect is set to be consistent with the display effect of model A.
  • the display effect of electronic devices of different models other than model A can be set to be consistent with the display effect of model A.
  • the second electronic device may extract the difference correction parameter associated with itself (ie, associated with the second hardware parameter) from the correction data packet according to the locally corresponding second hardware parameter.
  • the above-mentioned correction parameter package may store difference correction tables associated with different electronic devices, the reference device parameters of all the above-mentioned difference correction tables are the first hardware parameters, and the target in the above-mentioned difference correction table A device parameter is the device parameter of another device with which it is associated.
  • the second electronic device may match the target device parameters with the local second hardware parameters, and use the difference correction table matching the target device parameters with the second hardware parameters as the difference correction table associated with the second electronic device, The difference correction table associated with the above is used as the difference correction parameter.
  • conversion functions associated with different electronic devices may be stored in the above-mentioned calibration parameter package, the reference device parameters of all the above-mentioned conversion functions are the first hardware parameters, and the target device parameters are different from those of different electronic devices.
  • the device parameters are associated, and in the same way as the method of obtaining the difference correction table, the second electronic device can select the conversion function associated with the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device from the correction parameter package as the above-mentioned difference correction parameter.
  • Step 3 If the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate a download request, and send the download request to the cloud server.
  • the offline database of the second electronic device does not store a calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter, it is necessary to download the calibration parameter package associated with the first hardware parameter in an online acquisition manner To local storage, that is, to the above-mentioned offline database.
  • the second electronic device may generate a download request, and the download request is to download the above-mentioned correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter.
  • the download request may carry the first hardware parameter, so that after receiving the download request, the cloud server may obtain the corresponding correction parameter package based on the first hardware parameter carried therein, and Feedback to the cloud server based on the correction parameter package.
  • step 3 may specifically include the following four steps, which are: step 3.1 to step 3.4, which are described in detail as follows:
  • Step 3.1 If the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate download prompt information.
  • the second electronic device since the second electronic device needs to download the correction data package from the cloud server, it needs to establish a communication connection with the cloud server, and the download process may cause traffic consumption. In this case, it needs to obtain the download authorization from the user, Therefore, a download prompt message can be generated to notify the user to confirm the above-mentioned download operation.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic diagram of a download process of a correction parameter package provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second electronic device eg, a smart TV
  • the download prompt message includes two controls, namely, a download confirmation control 121 and a download rejection control 122 .
  • the second electronic device detects that the user clicks on the control 121, it identifies that the user has initiated a confirmation operation, and then executes step 3.2; otherwise, if the second electronic device detects that the user clicks on the control 122, it identifies that the user initiates a rejection operation, and executes step 3.3 .
  • the download prompt information is configured with a valid duration, as shown in (a) of FIG. 12 , a timer control 123 is configured in the download prompt information, for example, the valid duration is 5 seconds. If the user's click operation on the confirm download control 121 and the download rejection control 122 is not received within the valid time period, it is recognized that the user does not agree to the download operation of the correction data package, that is, the content of step 3.3 is executed.
  • Step 3.2 The second electronic device generates the download request in response to the confirmation operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, and sends the download request to the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device if the second electronic device receives the confirmation operation initiated by the user, it recognizes that the user agrees to download the calibration parameter package from the cloud server. In this case, the second electronic device generates a download request and sends the download request to The cloud server, so that the cloud server feeds back a correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device can generate a download progress prompt box, so that the user can determine the current download progress, as shown in (b in Figure 12 ) ) shown.
  • Step 3.3 In response to the rejection operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, the second electronic device sends the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device and the first electronic device sent by the first electronic device.
  • the hardware parameters are uploaded to the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device receives the rejection operation initiated by the user, it means that the user does not agree to download the calibration parameter package from the cloud server.
  • the steps of parameters are completed by the cloud server.
  • the second electronic device can send the first hardware parameter of the first electronic device and the second hardware parameter about itself to the cloud server, so that the cloud server can calculate the difference correction parameter based on the above two parameters.
  • the cloud server can calculate the difference correction parameter based on the above two parameters.
  • the second electronic device can generate a calculation progress prompt box, so that the user can determine the current calculation progress, as shown in FIG. 12 . (c).
  • Step 3.4 The second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • step 4 is exactly the same as the implementation of step 2 in the online acquisition method.
  • step 2 in the online acquisition method.
  • a download prompt message is generated, so that the user can determine whether to perform the download operation, and then the difference correction parameters are obtained in a corresponding manner, so that the method for obtaining the difference correction parameters can be improved. It can also avoid the situation of consuming too much network traffic and occupying the storage resources of the device due to downloading the calibration parameter package when the user is waiting for confirmation, thereby improving the user experience.
  • Step 4 the second electronic device receives the correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the download request.
  • the cloud server after receiving the download request for the correction parameter package sent by the second electronic device, can obtain the correction parameter package associated with the first hardware parameter carried in the download request, and associate it with the first hardware parameter in the download request.
  • the correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is sent to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device After receiving the correction parameter package sent by the cloud server, the second electronic device may perform the operation of S1302, that is, extract the difference correction parameters from the correction parameter package.
  • the second electronic device may download the calibration parameter package related to the first electronic device in advance, and then in the subsequent process of synchronizing the display effect with the first electronic device, it does not need to be connected to the Internet again, but can
  • the difference correction parameters are obtained through the locally stored correction parameter package, which can reduce the browsing consumption of obtaining the difference correction parameters, and because there is no need to communicate with the cloud server, the efficiency of obtaining the difference correction parameters can be further improved, and the response speed of the display effect synchronization can be improved.
  • the first electronic device sends the first display parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device may send the first display parameter related to the local display setting to the second electronic device.
  • the method of sending the first display is the same as the method of sending the first hardware parameter, and both can be sent through the established communication connection between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the first display parameter may include multiple parameter items, for example, screen brightness, color gamut, white point coordinates, screen color temperature, sharpness, saturation, display mode, etc. of the display module are related to display parameter.
  • the display modes may specifically include: cinema mode, eye protection mode, sharp mode, etc., and corresponding display parameters may be associated with different display modes.
  • the first display parameter can be manually set by the user, or can be dynamically adjusted according to the scene where the first electronic device is located.
  • the first electronic device can be based on the ambient light intensity of the current scene. Adjust the screen brightness of the display module of the first electronic device, or, according to the data content of the current display module, adjust the screen contrast and screen brightness (if the overall tone of the displayed picture is dark, the screen brightness can be appropriately increased; If the overall tone of the picture is brighter, you can appropriately reduce the screen brightness, etc.).
  • the first display parameter is a variable parameter.
  • the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device to the second electronic device is, specifically, the moment of receiving the collaborative operation initiated by the user. Display parameters corresponding to an electronic device.
  • the second electronic device may send a display parameter feedback request to the first electronic device, and the first electronic device may acquire the display parameter feedback request after receiving the above-mentioned display parameter feedback request.
  • the first display parameter corresponding to the current moment, and the first display parameter is sent to the second electronic device.
  • the above-mentioned display parameter feedback request may contain the parameter item of the display parameter required to be fed back, in this case, the first electronic device may obtain the parameter corresponding to each parameter item based on the parameter item of the display parameter feedback request. value, and generate the first display parameter, and send the first display parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device obtains the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device may adjust the difference correction parameter based on the first display parameter, thereby obtaining a display for setting the second display parameter of the second electronic device Correction parameters.
  • the first display parameter of the first electronic device is unknown when the difference correction parameter is acquired, and the parameter value of the first display parameter is different, it may correspond to different adjustment ratios.
  • the difference correction table is used to correct the sharpness in the second display parameter. According to the different sharpness of the first electronic device, the sharpness value to be adjusted is different. Therefore, it is necessary to determine the first display parameter of the first electronic device to determine the sharpness value that needs to be set for the second display parameter.
  • the second electronic device may, based on the parameter value of the parameter item corresponding to the first display parameter, obtain the parameter value associated with the parameter value corresponding to the parameter item from the difference correction parameter.
  • Correction coefficient Based on the correction coefficients of all parameter items, the above-mentioned display correction parameters are obtained.
  • the manner of acquiring the display correction parameter may also include two manners: online acquisition and offline acquisition.
  • the second electronic device can send the first display parameter and the second display parameter to the cloud server, and receive the display correction feedback from the cloud server based on the first display parameter and the second display parameter parameter.
  • the cloud server may store the above-mentioned difference correction parameter, and the difference correction parameter may be a correction parameter table or a correction parameter conversion function.
  • the cloud server may query the above-mentioned difference correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the second display parameter.
  • the correction parameter table or the above-mentioned correction parameter conversion function is imported, so that the corresponding display correction parameters can be obtained, and the display correction parameters are sent to the second electronic device.
  • the cloud server may not send the difference correction parameters to the second electronic device, and the second electronic device may send the first hardware parameters and the second hardware parameters to the cloud.
  • the cloud server can determine the difference correction parameter according to the above two parameters, and feed back a successful reception information to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device can receive The received first display parameter is sent to the cloud server, and the cloud server can determine the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter determined above, and send the display difference parameter to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device can calculate and display the correction parameters locally according to the difference correction parameters and the first hardware parameters, without uploading the above two parameters to the cloud server again for calculation.
  • the difference correction parameter stores a set of discrete numerical values calibrated based on different parameter values of the display parameter, and the second electronic device can select a corresponding one from the plurality of discrete numerical values according to the first display parameter, as the above-mentioned display.
  • the two points closest to the first display parameter may be selected for linear interpolation calculation to obtain A difference correction parameter matching the first display parameter is obtained, wherein the above-mentioned linear interpolation formula can be specifically:
  • x 0 is the parameter value of the first display parameter
  • x 2 and x 1 are the other two discrete values adjacent to the first display parameter in the difference correction parameter
  • f(x 1 ) and f(x 2 ) are the above
  • f(x 0 ) is the display correction parameter corresponding to the first display parameter.
  • the second electronic device may obtain the difference correction parameter according to the first hardware parameter, receive the first display parameter fed back by the first electronic device, and obtain the display correction parameter based on the difference correction parameter and the first display parameter, thereby Differences in display effects caused by differences in hardware and display settings of electronic devices can be taken into account, thereby improving the accuracy of adjustment of display effects.
  • the second electronic device adjusts the third display parameter based on the display correction parameter to obtain the second display parameter.
  • the second electronic device displays the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content and the first display effect of the data content.
  • the second display effect of the electronic device displaying the data content is consistent.
  • the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter respectively, and the second electronic device can obtain the corresponding difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter, so as to obtain a The approximate adjustment range, and then the above-mentioned difference correction parameters are fine-tuned according to the first display parameters, and then the display correction parameters are obtained. , which improves the accuracy of display synchronization.
  • the above embodiment describes the implementation process of the display method of the electronic device from the perspective of interaction between the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • Another embodiment of the present application uses the first electronic device as the execution body of the process to describe the electronic device.
  • the implementation process of the display method The implementation process of the display method of the electronic device on the first electronic device side provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail as follows:
  • Step 1 In response to a screen projection operation initiated by a user, the first electronic device sends a screen projection instruction to the second electronic device corresponding to the screen projection operation.
  • Step 2 the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter about the first electronic device to the second electronic device, so that the second electronic device can be based on the second hardware of the second electronic device parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter to determine the second display parameter;
  • Step 3 the first electronic device sends the data content to the second electronic device, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content based on the second display parameter and the first electronic device displays the first display effect based on the first display
  • the parameter shows that the second display effect of the data content is the same.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first definition
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following : second contrast ratio, second dynamic range, second color gamut, second brightness, second sharpness;
  • the first display effect of the above-mentioned second electronic device displaying the data content is consistent with the second display effect of the first electronic device displaying the data content, including at least one of the following:
  • the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast is less than a preset first threshold
  • the difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range is less than a preset second threshold
  • the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut is less than a preset third threshold
  • the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness is less than a preset fourth threshold
  • the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is less than a preset fifth threshold.
  • the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the first electronic device to the second electronic device, including:
  • Step 2.1 the first electronic device sends the first hardware parameter to the second electronic device, so that the second electronic device obtains the difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • Step 2.2 the first electronic device sends the first display parameter to the second electronic device, so that the second electronic device obtains the display according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter Correction parameters.
  • the first electronic device may send the first hardware parameters and the first display parameters of the first electronic device to the second electronic device that needs to synchronize the display effect
  • the second electronic device may Its own second hardware parameter, first hardware parameter and first display parameter are used to determine the second display parameter of the second electronic device, and the second display parameter determined based on the above three parameters can eliminate the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the display effect is affected by different hardware devices between devices.
  • the second electronic device can display the data content according to the second display parameters, so as to ensure the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the corresponding display effects for the same content are kept the same, to avoid deviations in the display effect of the same data content due to differences in hardware modules or different display settings, and to improve the accuracy of display parameter settings.
  • Another embodiment of the present application uses the second electronic device as the execution body of the process to describe the implementation process of the display method of the electronic device.
  • the implementation process of the display method of the electronic device on the second electronic device side provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail as follows:
  • Step 1 the second electronic device receives the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device.
  • Step 2 the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device;
  • Step 3 the second electronic device displays the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content and the first electronic device.
  • the second display effect of the device displaying the data content is consistent.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first definition
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following : second contrast ratio, second dynamic range, second color gamut, second brightness, second sharpness;
  • the first display effect of the second electronic device displaying the data content is consistent with the second display effect of the first electronic device displaying the data content, including at least one of the following:
  • the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast is less than a preset first threshold
  • the difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range is less than a preset second threshold
  • the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut is less than a preset third threshold
  • the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness is less than a preset fourth threshold
  • the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is less than a preset fifth threshold.
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device, including:
  • the second electronic device generates a display correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter;
  • the second electronic device obtains the second display parameter by adjusting the third display parameter of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device generates a display correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • the second electronic device obtains the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device searches an offline database for a calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter
  • the second electronic device extracts the discrepancy correction parameters associated with the second hardware parameters of the second electronic device from the correction parameter package.
  • the second electronic device searches an offline database for a calibration parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter, including:
  • the second electronic device does not find the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter in the offline database, generate a download request, and send the download request to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the download request.
  • a download request is generated, and the download request is sent to the cloud server.
  • requests including:
  • the second electronic device generates the download request in response to the confirmation operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, and sends the download request to the cloud server.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second electronic device In response to the rejection operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, the second electronic device uploads the second hardware parameters of the second electronic device and the first hardware parameters sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • the second electronic device receives the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second electronic device determines the second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device, including:
  • the second electronic device searches for a preset parameter matching the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter from a preset comparison parameter relationship table, and uses the preset parameter as the second display parameter.
  • the method before the second electronic device receives the device reference parameters sent by the first electronic device, the method further includes:
  • the second electronic device receives a screen projection instruction sent by the first electronic device, where the screen projection instruction is generated by the first electronic device in response to a screen projection operation initiated by a user.
  • the first electronic device may send the first hardware parameters and the first display parameters of the first electronic device to the second electronic device that needs to synchronize the display effect
  • the second electronic device may Its own second hardware parameter, first hardware parameter and first display parameter are used to determine the second display parameter of the second electronic device, and the second display parameter determined based on the above three parameters can eliminate the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the display effect is affected by different hardware devices between devices.
  • the second electronic device can display the data content according to the second display parameters, so as to ensure the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the corresponding display effects of the same content are kept the same, to avoid deviations in the display effects of the same data content due to differences in hardware modules or display settings, and to improve the accuracy of display parameter settings.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a structure of a display device of the electronic device. For convenience of description, only the part related to the embodiment of the present application is shown.
  • the display device of the electronic equipment includes:
  • a device reference parameter sending unit configured to send a first hardware parameter and a first display parameter about the first electronic device to a second electronic device, so that the second electronic device can
  • the hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter, and the first display parameter determine the second display parameter.
  • the above-mentioned device reference parameter sending unit can be specifically implemented by the wireless communication module 160 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , and can also be implemented by the mobile communication module 150 . It is a wired communication connection, and the device reference parameters can also be sent to the second electronic device through the universal serial bus interface 130 .
  • the above-mentioned reference parameters of the sending device may be stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • a first display effect synchronization unit configured to send data content to a second electronic device, where the second electronic device displays a first display effect of the data content and the first electronic device displays a second display of the data content The effect is the same.
  • the above-mentioned first display effect synchronization unit can be specifically implemented by the display screen 194 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , and the display screen 194 outputs the first image.
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first definition
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following : second contrast ratio, second dynamic range, second color gamut, second brightness, second sharpness;
  • a first contrast synchronization unit for the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast is smaller than a preset first threshold
  • a first dynamic range synchronization unit configured for the difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range to be less than a preset second threshold
  • a first color gamut synchronization unit for the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut is smaller than a preset third threshold
  • a first brightness synchronization unit for the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness is less than a preset fourth threshold
  • a first definition synchronization unit used for the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition being less than a preset fifth threshold
  • the first contrast synchronization unit, the first dynamic range synchronization unit, the first color gamut synchronization unit, the first brightness synchronization unit, and the first definition synchronization unit can all be implemented by the display screen 194 .
  • the device reference parameter sending unit includes:
  • a first hardware parameter sending unit configured to send the first hardware parameter to the second electronic device, so that the second electronic device obtains a difference correction parameter based on the first hardware parameter.
  • a first display parameter sending unit configured to send the first display parameter to the second electronic device, so that the second electronic device obtains the display according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter Correction parameters.
  • the first hardware parameter sending unit and the first display parameter sending unit can also be implemented by the above-mentioned multiple modules.
  • the display device of the electronic device further includes:
  • the screen projection operation response unit is configured to respond to a screen projection operation initiated by a user, and send a screen projection instruction to the second electronic device corresponding to the screen projection operation.
  • the above-mentioned screen projection operation response unit may be implemented by the sensor module 180, which includes different types of sensors, and the sensors for realizing the screen projection operation response unit may be specifically the pressure sensor 180A and the touch sensor 180K.
  • the first electronic device may send the first hardware parameters and the first display parameters of the first electronic device to the second electronic device that needs to perform display effect synchronization
  • the second electronic device may The second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the device itself are used to determine the second display parameter of the second electronic device.
  • the second display parameter determined based on the above three parameters can eliminate the first electronic device and the second display parameter.
  • the display effect is affected by different hardware devices between electronic devices.
  • the second electronic device can display the data content according to the second display parameters, so as to ensure the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the corresponding display effects of the same content are kept consistent between devices, avoiding deviations in the display effects when displaying the same data content due to differences in hardware modules or different display settings, and improving the accuracy of display parameter settings.
  • Embodiment 2 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 1:
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a structure of a display device of the electronic device. For the convenience of description, only the part related to the embodiment of the present application is shown.
  • the display device of the electronic equipment includes:
  • the device reference parameter receiving unit is configured to receive the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device.
  • the above-mentioned device reference parameter receiving unit can be specifically implemented by the wireless communication module 160 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , and can also be implemented by the mobile communication module 150 . It is a wired communication connection, and the device reference parameter sent by the first electronic device can also be received through the universal serial bus interface 130 .
  • a second display parameter determining unit configured to determine a second display parameter according to the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the second electronic device
  • the above-mentioned second display parameter determination unit can be specifically implemented by the processor 110 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , the processor sets the display parameters of the display screen, and stores the set second display parameters in the internal memory 121.
  • a second display effect synchronization unit configured to display the data content sent by the first electronic device according to the second display parameter, and the second electronic device displays the first display effect of the data content and the first electronic device The second display effect of the device displaying the data content is consistent.
  • the above-mentioned second display effect synchronization unit may be specifically implemented by the display screen 194 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , and the second image is displayed by the display screen 194 .
  • the source data corresponding to the second image may be stored in the internal memory 121 of the electronic device 100 .
  • the first display effect includes at least one of the following: a first contrast ratio, a first dynamic range, a first color gamut, a first brightness, and a first definition
  • the second display effect includes at least one of the following : second contrast ratio, second dynamic range, second color gamut, second brightness, second sharpness;
  • a second contrast synchronization unit configured for the difference between the first contrast and the second contrast to be less than a preset first threshold
  • a second dynamic range synchronization unit configured for a difference between the first dynamic range and the second dynamic range to be less than a preset second threshold
  • a second color gamut synchronization unit configured for the difference between the first color gamut and the second color gamut to be less than a preset third threshold
  • a second brightness synchronization unit configured for the difference between the first brightness and the second brightness to be less than a preset fourth threshold
  • the second definition synchronization unit is used for the difference between the score of the first definition and the score of the second definition is smaller than a preset fifth threshold.
  • the second contrast synchronization unit, the second dynamic range synchronization unit, the second color gamut synchronization unit, the second brightness synchronization unit, and the second definition synchronization unit can all be implemented by the display screen 194 .
  • the second display parameter determination unit includes:
  • a display correction parameter generating unit configured to generate display correction parameters based on the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • the above-mentioned display correction parameter generating unit can be specifically implemented by the processor 110 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , and the processor processes the first hardware parameter, the first display parameter and the second hardware parameter to obtain the display correction parameter.
  • a display parameter adjustment unit configured to adjust a third display parameter of the second electronic device based on the display correction parameter to obtain the second display parameter.
  • the above-mentioned display parameter adjustment unit can be specifically implemented by the processor 110 in the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 , wherein the processor 110 can acquire the local third display parameter from the internal memory 121 , and then pair the display correction parameters based on the local third display parameters.
  • the third display parameter is adjusted to obtain the adjusted second display parameter, which is then stored in the internal memory 121 again.
  • the adjusted second display parameter it is specifically implemented based on the display screen 194 .
  • the device reference parameter receiving unit includes:
  • a first hardware parameter receiving unit configured to receive the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device
  • a first display parameter receiving unit configured to receive the first display parameter sent by the first electronic device
  • the above two receiving units are consistent with the device reference parameter receiving unit, and can be implemented by the wireless communication module 160 , the mobile communication module 150 and the universal serial bus interface 130 .
  • the display correction parameter generating unit includes:
  • a discrepancy correction parameter generating unit configured to obtain discrepancy correction parameters based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter
  • a display correction parameter obtaining unit configured to obtain the display correction parameter according to the first display parameter and the difference correction parameter.
  • the difference correction parameter generating unit and the display correction parameter obtaining unit may be specifically implemented by the processor 110 .
  • the difference correction parameter generating unit includes:
  • a first hardware parameter uploading unit configured to upload the second hardware parameter about the second electronic device and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device to the cloud server;
  • a first difference correction parameter receiving unit configured to receive the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the first hardware parameter uploading unit and the first difference correction parameter receiving unit may be implemented by the wireless communication module 160 and the mobile communication module 150 .
  • the difference correction parameter generating unit includes:
  • a correction parameter package search unit configured to search for a correction parameter package matching the first hardware parameter from an offline database
  • the offline database may be stored in the internal memory 121 , and searching for the offline data package may be implemented by the processor 110 , and the processor 110 retrieves the corresponding correction parameter package from the memory storage 121 .
  • a difference correction parameter extraction unit configured to extract the difference correction parameter associated with the second hardware parameter of the second electronic device from the correction parameter package.
  • the difference correction parameter extraction unit may be specifically implemented based on the processor 110 .
  • correction parameter package search unit includes:
  • a calibration parameter package downloading unit configured to generate a download request if the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is not found in the offline database, and send the download request to the cloud server;
  • a correction parameter package receiving unit configured to receive the correction parameter package that matches the first hardware parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the download request.
  • the calibration parameter package downloading unit and the calibration parameter package receiving unit may be implemented by the wireless communication module 160 and the mobile communication module 150 .
  • the calibration parameter package downloading unit includes:
  • a download prompt information generating unit configured to generate download prompt information if the calibration parameter package matching the first hardware parameter is not found in the offline database
  • the download prompt information generating unit may be implemented based on the display screen 194 , and the download prompt information is displayed through the display screen 194 .
  • a confirmation download response unit configured to generate the download request in response to a confirmation operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, and send the download request to the cloud server.
  • the confirmation download response unit may be implemented based on the sensor module 180, and specifically, the confirmation operation of the user may be acquired through the pressure sensor 180A and the touch sensor 1850E.
  • a download request is sent to the cloud server through the wireless communication module 160 and the mobile communication module 150 .
  • the calibration parameter package downloading unit includes:
  • a refusal to download response unit configured to, in response to a refusal operation initiated by the user based on the download prompt information, send the second hardware parameter about the second electronic device and the first hardware parameter sent by the first electronic device Upload to cloud server;
  • the refusal to download response unit may be implemented based on the sensor module 180, and specifically, the user's refusal operation may be acquired through the pressure sensor 180A and the touch sensor 1850E.
  • the first hardware parameter is sent to the cloud server through the wireless communication module 160 and the mobile communication module 150 .
  • a second difference correction parameter receiving unit configured to receive the difference correction parameter fed back by the cloud server based on the first hardware parameter and the second hardware parameter.
  • the second difference correction parameter receiving unit may be implemented by the wireless communication module 160 and the mobile communication module 150 .
  • the second display parameter determination unit is specifically configured to search for a preset matching the second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter from a preset comparison parameter relationship table. Set parameters, and use the preset parameters as the second display parameters.
  • the display device of the electronic device further includes:
  • a screen-casting instruction receiving unit configured to receive a screen-casting instruction sent by the first electronic device, where the screen-casting instruction is generated by the first electronic device in response to a screen-casting operation initiated by a user.
  • the above-mentioned screen projection instruction receiving unit may be implemented by the wireless communication module 160 , the mobile communication module 150 and the universal serial bus interface 130 .
  • the first electronic device may send the first hardware parameters and the first display parameters of the first electronic device to the second electronic device that needs to perform display effect synchronization
  • the second electronic device may The second hardware parameter, the first hardware parameter and the first display parameter of the device itself are used to determine the second display parameter of the second electronic device.
  • the second display parameter determined based on the above three parameters can eliminate the first electronic device and the second display parameter.
  • the display effect is affected by different hardware devices between electronic devices.
  • the second electronic device can display the data content according to the second display parameters, so as to ensure the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the corresponding display effects of the same content are kept consistent between devices, avoiding deviations in the display effects when the same data content is displayed due to differences in hardware modules or different display settings, and improving the accuracy of display parameter settings.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide an electronic device, the electronic device comprising: at least one processor, a memory, and a computer program stored in the memory and executable on the at least one processor, the processor executing The computer program implements the steps in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps in the foregoing method embodiments can be implemented.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, when the computer program product runs on a mobile terminal, the steps in the foregoing method embodiments can be implemented when the mobile terminal executes the computer program product.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the present application realizes all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments, which can be completed by instructing the relevant hardware through a computer program, and the computer program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer program includes computer program code
  • the computer program code may be in the form of source code, object code, executable file or some intermediate form, and the like.
  • the computer-readable medium may include at least: any entity or device capable of carrying the computer program code to the photographing device/electronic device, recording medium, computer memory, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), electrical carrier signals, telecommunication signals, and software distribution media.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • electrical carrier signals telecommunication signals
  • software distribution media For example, U disk, mobile hard disk, disk or CD, etc.
  • computer readable media may not be electrical carrier signals and telecommunications signals.
  • the disclosed apparatus/network device and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus/network device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, such as multiple units. Or components may be combined or may be integrated into another system, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Controls And Circuits For Display Device (AREA)

Abstract

适用于设备管理技术领域，提供了一种电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质，电子设备的显示方法包括：第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数（S401）；第二电子设备根据第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数（S402）；第二电子设备显示数据内容的第一显示效果与第一电子设备显示数据内容的第二显示效果一致（S403）。提供的技术方案可以能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一内容数据显示时的显示效果存在偏差，提高了显示参数调整的准确性以及调整效率。

Description

电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质
本申请要求于2021年03月31日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202110354665.2、申请名称为“电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请属于设备管理技术领域，尤其涉及电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质。
背景技术
随着电子技术的不断发展，一个用户往往可以持有多个不同的电子设备。而由于不同的电子设备的硬件模块以及显示配置的不同，同一数据内容在不同电子设备上的显示效果也会存在一定的差异。举例性地，电子设备内存储的图像数据一般是采用红绿蓝RGB格式，电子设备在显示图像数据时，是根据图像数据内各个像素点的像素值，确定电子设备上显示模块内该像素点对应的显示位置所显示的颜色，但由于不同电子设备的显示模块的显示原理不同，例如某一电子设备的显示模块为液晶显示LCD(Liquid Crystal Display)模块，则是基于背板的背光透过带颜色的薄膜从而显示出相应的颜色，而另一电子设备的显示模块为有机电激光OLED(OrganicLight-Emitting Diode)模块，则是基于自发光原理，上述两种显示模块的发光原理不同，因此即便基于同一RGB像素值控制显示单元进行输出时，用户观看上述两个显示模块时所看见的颜色也会存在差异，即不同设备间会存在色彩偏差，从而导致了同一数据内容在不同电子设备上的显示效果不一致。当然，上述显示效果的不一致除了色彩偏差这一方面外，还可以体现在画面的清晰度以及颜色范围(即色域)等多个方面。
在部分使用场景下，不同电子设备之间显示效果不一致，会大大影响用户的使用体验，以及降低了用户操作的准确性。
举例性地，在绘画场景下不同电子设备需要对同一数据内容进行显示时，若不同的电子设备的显示效果不一致，会影响用户在绘画过程中使用体验。例如，用户在一智能手机上绘制一图像。用户在绘制结束后，可以对绘制得到的图像进行保存，并存储在智能手机的存储器内。若后续用户需要在另一设备上对已绘制的图像进行编辑时，例如在一平板电脑上编辑，则智能手机可以将本地存储的图像文件发送给平板电脑，平板电脑可以在显示模块上显示接收到的图像文件，即生成对应的图像。若在智能手机上显示的图像与在平板电脑上显示的图像(虽然两个电子设备均基于相同的图像文件在显示模块上生成上述图像)存在色彩偏差，则用户在平板电脑上编辑图像时，可能会重新对图像的局部或整体的颜色重新进行选择，大大影响了用户绘制图像过程的使用体验。
举例性地，在视频会议场景下不同电子设备需要对同一数据内容进行显示时，若不同的电子设备的显示效果不一致，也同样会影响用户在视频会议过程中沟通效果。例如，用户A与用户B就同一案件进行视频会议，用户A与用户B讨论的内容具体为对若干图片进行分析，该图片可以为一绘画作品，也可以是一彩色多普勒超声图像， 即彩超。以对一彩超讨论为例进行说明，用户A和用户B需要就该彩超来确定患者的身体情况，以得到对应的就诊建议，若用户A使用的第一电子设备上彩超的显示效果与用户B使用的第二电子设备上彩超的显示效果不一致，则用户A和用户B对于患者的身体情况的判定结果会存在差异，甚至可能会导致就诊建议与患者不匹配的情况发生。对于绘画作品分析也会存在类似的问题，由于不同电子设备对于同一绘画作品进行显示时会存在色偏，从而导致了用户在不同设备上观看同一绘画作品时会有不同的感官体验，并且在观看绘画作品时用户更加注重颜色细节，因此，上述色偏对于用户的使用体验会进一步增大，从而导致对同一绘画作品在不同电子设备上显示时得到的评价结果不一致。
示例性地，图1示出了在不同电子设备间对某一数据内容进行投屏显示的示意图。参见图1所示，用户持有两个电子设备，分别为一智能手机，另一个则是智能电视，智能手机可以将本地显示的内容发送给智能电视进行显示，以实现跨设备间的投屏功能。在该情况下，用户可以在智能手机上进行图像绘制，并将智能手机上绘制过程中的画面投屏至智能电视上显示。由于智能手机上的屏幕尺寸较小，为了进一步查看绘制图像过程中的细节，用户可以在绘制图像时对照智能电视与智能手机两个屏幕上显示的内容进行创作。然而，由于智能手机与智能电视之间的显示效果不一致，存在色偏的情况，会影响用户的绘画创造，例如在进行调色时，用户在智能手机上选取的颜色11，最终在智能电视上观看的视觉感受是颜色12，大大降低了用户的使用体验。
但由于上述显示效果的差异，并非由于不同电子设备上接收到的数据内容的数据不一致而导致的，例如智能手机以及智能电视均显示一个RGB值为(155,252,35)的单色图像时，用户在智能手机上查看到的效果与在智能电视上查看的效果会存在差异(例如在智能手机上显示上述单色图像时色彩较为暗淡，而在智能电视上显示上述单色图像是色彩较为鲜艳)，又例如，由于智能手机的背板的发光功率与智能电视的背板的发光功率存在差异，即便将智能手机的屏幕亮度与智能电视的屏幕亮度均调整到相同的数值，如调整到100％，用户实际的感官也是手机屏幕偏暗，而智能电视的屏幕偏亮，即上述差异是电子设备间硬件模块与实际显示过程中设备配置的显示参数所带来的。由此可见，不同电子设备之间在显示同一数据内容时，由于设备间的差异会导致出现色偏的情况，即不同电子设备在对同一数据内容进行显示时会出现显示效果不一致的情况，上述现象会大大影响用户的观看体验。
为了解决现有不同电子设备间对同一数据内容进行显示时存在色偏的问题，现有的解决办法是依赖用户手动校正。如上所述，存在色偏的问题并非由于数据内容在不同电子设备上显示时数据不一致导致的，而是由于电子设备间硬件设备以及显示参数等因素决定的，而上述差异，对于电子设备而言是不可测的，因此，往往是用户通过肉眼观察两个电子设备在显示同一数据内容时显示效果的差异，对其中一个电子设备或同时对两个电子设备的显示参数进行调整，从而保持两个电子设备的显示效果一致。
然而上述方式，依赖用户对于各个显示参数对显示效果影响的理解，例如，某一显示参数包括背光强度，用户需要知道调整背光强度，对于电子设备在显示图像时具体会产生哪种影响，大大增加了电子设备间显示效果一致性调整的难度。并且，为了提高调整的精度，电子设备可配置的显示参数的项数往往较多，也使得调整过程变得 繁琐以及复杂，对于部分显示效果的差异，例如两个电子设备间的清晰度以及颜色的动态范围等，较难通过一张或几张图片来确定差异，则用户较难进行手动调节，也进一步增加了手动调整的难度。
另一方面，由于上述手动调整的过程，只能够对保证指定的某两个电子设备间显示效果的一致性，若在多设备协同工作的过程中，对其中一个电子设备进行更换或增加多一个电子设备，则需要重新进行手动调节显示参数的操作，大大降低了多设备协同工作的效率以及用户的使用体验。
现有的另一种解决显示效果不一致的方法具体为：在需要多设备协同工作的场景下，例如需要进行多用户间的视频会议过程中，不同用户可以采用相同型号的电子设备，并将各个电子设备的显示参数保持统一，从而保证了在显示相同的数据内容时显示效果一致。由于不同用户采用相同型号的电子设备，因此，不同电子设备所采用的硬件模块相同，电子设备的材质、显示模块的发光源里等硬件参数相同，并且通过将显示参数配置为统一值，从而能够保证不同电子设备间的显示效果一致。
然而上述方式，要求协同工作的多个电子设备均采用相同型号的设备，然而在部分场景下，例如实现投屏功能时，往往是需要在不同类型的电子设备上显示相同的数据内容，例如将智能手机的内容投屏至智能电视机上显示，在该情况下，则无法保持两个电子设备间的显示效果一致，上述解决方案的适用范围较小，应用难度较大。
由此可见，对于不同电子设备间显示效果不一致的问题，例如不同电子设备对同一图像显示时，会出现颜色深浅、亮度以及明暗区域分布不相同的情况，现有的方式主要是通过人工手动调整，或者采用相同的设备型号的多个电子设备对同一数据内容进行显示，上述两种方式无法兼顾调整的准确性以及适用范围两个方面。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质，可以解决现有的设备管理技术，在需要保持不同电子设备之间显示效果的一致性时，一般是通过人工手动调整，或者采用相同的设备型号的多个电子设备对同一数据内容进行显示，上述两种方式无法兼顾调整的准确性以及适用范围两个方面，从而导致在需要调整不同电子设备的显示参数以保持显示效果一致时，调整难度大以及调整效率低的问题。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备的显示方法，包括：
第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
实施本申请实施例具有以下有益效果：通过将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给需要进行显示效果同步的第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以根据第二电子设备自身的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电 子设备的第二显示参数，基于上述三个参数确定的第二显示参数可以消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因硬件器件不同而带来显示效果的影响，在后续显示的过程中，第二电子设备可以根据第二显示参数对数据内容进行显示，从而能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间对同一内容时对应的显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一数据内容显示时的显示效果产生偏差，提高了显示参数设置的准确性。另一方面，在用户需要同步任意两个电子设备之间的显示效果时，其中一个电子设备也能够根据另一电子设备反馈的硬件参数以及对端的显示参数确定本地的显示参数，上述显示参数的设置过程是设备自动执行的，对于用户而言是无感的，无需用户进行手动对显示参数进行配置以及频繁对设备的电子设备进行手动调节，从而能够提高参数设置的效率以及用户的使用体验。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，包括以下至少一种：
所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
所述第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以 及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
所述第二电子设备从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，包括：
若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求，包括：
若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，在若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息之后，还包括：
所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
在第一方面的一种可能实现方式中，在所述第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数之前，还包括：
所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作，将投屏指令发送给所述投屏操作对应的所述第二电子设备。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备的显示方法，应用于第二电子设备，包括：
所述第二电子设备接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容， 所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，包括以下至少一种：
所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
所述第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
所述第二电子设备从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，包括：
若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求，包括：
若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，在若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息之后，还包括：
所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中，在所述第二电子设备接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数之前，还包括：
所述第二电子设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的投屏指令，所述投屏指令是所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作时生成的。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备的显示装置，包括：
设备基准参数接收单元，用于接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数；
第二显示参数确定单元，用于根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
第二显示效果同步单元，用于根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
所述第二显示效果同步单元，包括以下至少一种：
第二对比度同步单元，用于所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预 设的第一阈值；
第二动态范围同步单元，用于所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
第二色域同步单元，用于所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
第二亮度同步单元，用于所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
第二清晰度同步单元，用于所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二显示参数确定单元，包括：
显示校正参数生成单元，用于基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
显示参数调整单元，用于基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述显示校正参数生成单元包括：
差异校正参数生成单元，用于基于所述第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
显示校正参数获得单元，用于根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述差异校正参数生成单元包括：
第一硬件参数上传单元，用于将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
第一差异校正参数接收单元，用于接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述差异校正参数生成单元包括：
校正参数包查找单元，用于从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
差异校正参数提取单元，用于从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述校正参数包查找单元包括：
校正参数包下载单元，用于若在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
校正参数包接收单元，用于接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述校正参数包下载单元包括：
下载提示信息生成单元，用于若在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
确认下载响应单元，用于响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，校正参数包下载单元包括：
拒绝下载响应单元，用于响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
第二差异校正参数接收单元，用于接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述第二显示参数确定单元，具体用于从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
在第三方面的一种可能实现方式中，所述电子设备的显示装置还包括：
投屏指令接收单元，用于接收所述第一电子设备发送的投屏指令，所述投屏指令是所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作时生成的。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备，包括一个或多个触摸屏，一个或多个存储器，一个或多个处理器；其中所述一个或多个储存器存储有一个或多个程序；当所述一个或多个处理器在执行所述一个或多个程序时，使得所述电子设备实现上述第二方面中任一项所述电子设备的显示方法。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，其特征在于，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述第二方面中任一项所述电子设备的显示方法。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时，使得电子设备执行上述第二方面中任一项所述电子设备的显示方法。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片***，包括处理器，处理器与存储器耦合，所述处理器执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以实现如上述第二方面中任一项所述电子设备的显示方法。
可以理解的是，上述第二方面至第七方面的有益效果可以参见上述第一方面中的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
附图说明
图1是在不同电子设备间对某一数据内容进行投屏显示的示意图；
图2本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图；
图3是本申请实施例的电子设备的软件结构框图；
图4是本申请一实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法的交互流程图；
图5是本申请一实施例提供的基于无线局域网络的连接示意图；
图6是本申请一实施例提供的发起投屏操作的示意图；
图7是本申请一实施例提供的发起视频通话操作的示意图；
图8a是本申请一实施例提供的第二电子设备调整前的色域示意图；
图8b是本申请一实施例提供的第一电子设备的色域示意图；
图8c是本申请一实施例提供的第二电子设备调整后的色域示意图；
图9a是本申请一实施例提供的第二电子设备调整前对某一图像的显示效果的示意图；
图9b是本申请一实施例提供的第一电子设备对某一图像的显示效果的示意图；
图9c是本申请一实施例提供的第二电子设备调整后对某一图像的显示效果的示意图；
图10是本申请另一实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法的交互流程图；
图11是本申请一实施例提供的云端服务器基设备校正参数表确定差异校正参数的示意图；
图12是本申请一实施例提供的校正参数包的下载过程的示意图。
具体实施方式
以下描述中，为了说明而不是为了限定，提出了诸如特定***结构、技术之类的具体细节，以便透彻理解本申请实施例。然而，本领域的技术人员应当清楚，在没有这些具体细节的其它实施例中也可以实现本申请。在其它情况中，省略对众所周知的***、装置、电路以及方法的详细说明，以免不必要的细节妨碍本申请的描述。
应当理解，当在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书中使用时，术语“包括”指示所描述特征、整体、步骤、操作、元素和/或组件的存在，但并不排除一个或多个其它特征、整体、步骤、操作、元素、组件和/或其集合的存在或添加。
还应当理解，在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书中使用的术语“和/或”是指相关联列出的项中的一个或多个的任何组合以及所有可能组合，并且包括这些组合。
如在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样，术语“如果”可以依据上下文被解释为“当...时”或“一旦”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测到”。类似地，短语“如果确定”或“如果检测到[所描述条件或事件]”可以依据上下文被解释为意指“一旦确定”或“响应于确定”或“一旦检测到[所描述条件或事件]”或“响应于检测到[所描述条件或事件]”。
另外，在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书的描述中，术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”等仅用于区分描述，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性。
在本申请说明书中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此，在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“在一个实施例中”、“在一些实施例中”、“在其他一些实施例中”、“在另外一些实施例中”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例，而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”，除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”，除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。
本申请实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法可以应用于手机、平板电脑、可穿戴设备、车载设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer，UMPC)、上网本、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)等电子设备上，本申请实施例对电子设备的具体类型不作任何限制。
例如，所述电子设备可以是WLAN中的站点(STAION，ST)，可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session InitiationProtocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、电脑、膝 上型计算机、手持式通信设备、手持式计算设备、和/或用于在无线***上进行通信的其它设备以及下一代通信***，例如，5G网络中的移动终端或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)网络中的移动终端等。
图2示出了电子设备100的一种结构示意图。
电子设备100可以包括处理器110，外部存储器接口120，内部存储器121，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口130，充电管理模块140，电源管理模块141，电池142，天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，传感器模块180，按键190，马达191，指示器192，摄像头193，显示屏194，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A，陀螺仪传感器180B，气压传感器180C，磁传感器180D，加速度传感器180E，距离传感器180F，接近光传感器180G，指纹传感器180H，温度传感器180J，触摸传感器180K，环境光传感器180L，骨传导传感器180M等。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调处理器，图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)，图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。
控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。
处理器110中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中，处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器110的等待时间，因而提高了***的效率。
在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit，I2C)接口，集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound，I2S)接口，脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation，PCM)接口，通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter，UART)接口，移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface，MIPI)，通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output，GPIO)接口，用户标识模块(subscriber identity module，SIM)接口，和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口等。
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线，包括一根串行数据线(serial data line，SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line，SCL)。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K，充 电器，闪光灯，摄像头193等。例如：处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K，使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信，实现电子设备100的触摸功能。
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合，实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信，将模拟信号抽样，量化和编码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中，音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线，用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中，UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如：处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信，实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194，摄像头193等***器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface，CSI)，显示屏串行接口(display serial interface，DSI)等。在一些实施例中，处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信，实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信，实现电子设备100的显示功能。
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号，也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中，GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193，显示屏194，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口，I2S接口，UART接口，MIPI接口等。
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口，具体可以是Mini USB接口，Micro USB接口，USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电，也可以用于电子设备100与***设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机，通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备，例如AR设备等。
可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系，只是示意性说明，并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式，或多种接口连接方式的组合。
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中，充电器可以是无线充电器，也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142，充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理 模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入，为处理器110，内部存储器121，显示屏194，摄像头193，和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量，电池循环次数，电池健康状态(漏电，阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中，电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中，电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中，调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后，被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A，受话器170B等)输出声音信号，或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110，与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)网络)，蓝牙(bluetooth，BT)，全球导航卫星***(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信技术(near field communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。
在一些实施例中，电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合，天线2和无线通信模块160耦合，使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯***(global system for mobile communications，GSM)，通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service，GPRS)，码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)，宽带码分多址(wideband code division  multiple access，WCDMA)，时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access，TD-SCDMA)，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)，BT，GNSS，WLAN，NFC，FM，和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位***(global positioning system，GPS)，全球导航卫星***(global navigation satellite system，GLONASS)，北斗卫星导航***(beidou navigation satellite system，BDS)，准天顶卫星***(quasi-zenith satellite system，QZSS)和/或星基增强***(satellite based augmentation systems，SBAS)。
电子设备100通过GPU，显示屏194，以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器，连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算，用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU，其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。
显示屏194用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)，有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的，AMOLED)，柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode，FLED)，Miniled，MicroLed，Micro-oLed，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)等。在一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194，N为大于1的正整数。显示屏194可包括触控面板以及其他输入设备。
电子设备100可以通过ISP，摄像头193，视频编解码器，GPU，显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如，拍照时，打开快门，光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上，光信号转换为电信号，摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理，转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点，亮度，肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光，色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中，ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device，CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor，CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号，之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB，YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193，N为大于1的正整数。
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号，除了可以处理数字图像信号，还可以处理其他数字信号。例如，当电子设备100在频点选择时，数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样，电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频，例如：动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group，MPEG)1，MPEG2，MPEG3，MPEG4等。
NPU为神经网络(neural-network，NN)计算处理器，通过借鉴生物神经网络结构，例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式，对输入信息快速处理，还可以不断的自学习。通 过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用，例如：图像识别，脸部识别，语音识别，文本理解等。
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡，例如Micro SD卡，实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信，实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐，视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码，所述可执行程序代码包括指令。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作***，至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能，图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据，电话本等)等。此外，内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件，闪存器件，通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage，UFS)等。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，和/或存储在设置于处理器中的存储器的指令，执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放，录音等。
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出，也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中，或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。
扬声器170A，也称“喇叭”，用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐，或收听免提通话。
受话器170B，也称“听筒”，用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时，可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。
麦克风170C，也称“话筒”，“传声器”，用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时，用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声，将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C，除了采集声音信号，还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中，电子设备100还可以设置三个，四个或更多麦克风170C，实现采集声音信号，降噪，还可以识别声音来源，实现定向录音功能等。
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130，也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform，OMTP)标准接口，美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA，CTIA)标准接口。
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号，可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中，压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多，如电阻式压力传感器，电感式压力传感器，电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A，电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194，电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100 也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中，作用于相同触摸位置，但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作，可以对应不同的操作指令。例如：当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行新建短消息的指令。
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中，可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即，x，y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的，当按下快门，陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度，根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离，让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动，实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航，体感游戏场景。
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中，电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度，辅助定位和导航。
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中，当电子设备100是翻盖机时，电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态，设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态，应用于横竖屏切换，计步器等应用。
距离传感器180F，用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中，拍摄场景，电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器，例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时，可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时，电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话，以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式，口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合，检测电子设备100是否在口袋里，以防误触。
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁，访问应用锁，指纹拍照，指纹接听来电等。
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中，电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度，执行温度处理策略。例如，当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值，电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能，以便降低功耗实施 热保护。在另一些实施例中，当温度低于另一阈值时，电子设备100对电池142加热，以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中，当温度低于又一阈值时，电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压，以避免低温导致的异常关机。
触摸传感器180K，也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194，由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏，也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器，以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中，触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面，与显示屏194所处的位置不同。
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏，接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中，结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号，解析出语音信号，实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息，实现心率检测功能。
按键190包括开机键，音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入，产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示，也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如，作用于不同应用(例如拍照，音频播放等)的触摸操作，可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作，马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如：时间提醒，接收信息，闹钟，游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。
指示器192可以是指示灯，可以用于指示充电状态，电量变化，也可以用于指示消息，未接来电，通知等。
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过***SIM卡接口195，或从SIM卡接口195拔出，实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口，N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡，Micro SIM卡，SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时***多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同，也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互，实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中，电子设备100采用eSIM，即：嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中，不能和电子设备100分离。
电子设备100的软件***可以采用分层架构，事件驱动架构，微核架构，微服务架构，或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android***为例，示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。
图3是本申请实施例的电子设备的一种软件结构框图。
分层架构将软件分成若干个层，每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中，将Android***分为四层，从上至下分别为应用程 序层，应用程序框架层，安卓运行时(Android runtime)和***库，以及内核层。
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。
如图3所示，应用程序包可以包括相机，图库，日历，通话，地图，导航，WLAN，蓝牙，音乐，视频，短信息等应用程序。
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface，API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。
如图3所示，应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器，内容提供器，视图***，电话管理器，资源管理器，通知管理器等。
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小，判断是否有状态栏，锁定屏幕，截取屏幕等。
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据，并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频，图像，音频，拨打和接听的电话，浏览历史和书签，电话簿等。
视图***包括可视控件，例如显示文字的控件，显示图片的控件等。视图***可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如，包括短信通知图标的显示界面，可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。
电话管理器用于提供电子设备的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通，挂断等)。
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源，比如本地化字符串，图标，图片，布局文件，视频文件等等。
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息，可以用于传达告知类型的消息，可以短暂停留后自动消失，无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成，消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在***顶部状态栏的通知，例如后台运行的应用程序的通知，还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息，发出提示音，电子设备振动，指示灯闪烁等。
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓***的调度和管理。
核心库包含两部分：一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数，另一部分是安卓的核心库。
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理，堆栈管理，线程管理，安全和异常的管理，以及垃圾回收等功能。
***库可以包括多个功能模块。例如：表面管理器(surface manager)，媒体库(Media Libraries)，三维图形处理库(例如：OpenGL ES)，2D图形引擎(例如：SGL)等。
表面管理器用于对显示子***进行管理，并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。
媒体库支持多种常用的音频，视频格式回放和录制，以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式，例如:MPEG4，H.264，MP3，AAC，AMR，JPG，PNG等。
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图，图像渲染，合成，和图层处理等。
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动，摄像头驱动，音频驱动，传感器驱动。
下面结合捕获拍照场景，示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作，相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标，触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件，识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作，该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例，相机应用调用应用框架层的接口，启动相机应用，进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动，通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。
实施例一：
为了解决现有的设备管理技术，在需要保持不同电子设备之间显示效果的一致性时，一般是通过人工手动调整，或者采用相同的设备型号的多个电子设备对同一数据内容进行显示，上述两种方式无法兼顾调整的准确性以及适用范围两个方面，从而导致在需要调整不同电子设备的显示参数以保持显示效果一致时，调整难度大以及调整效率低的缺陷，本申请提供一种电子设备的显示方法，该电子设备的显示方法的执行主体具体包括两个电子设备，该电子设备可以为一智能手机、平板电脑、计算机、智能手表等电子设备，该电子设备配置有显示模块，电子设备可以通过对显示参数进行配置，以调整该电子设备上的显示模块的显示效果。上述两个电子设备可以是型号和/或类型相同的电子设备，也可以是型号和/或类型不同的电子设备，即本申请实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法适用于任意两个电子设备间的参数设置。
为了便于区分上述两个电子设备，可以将本申请实施例涉及的两个电子设备分别称为第一电子设备以及第二电子设备。由于为了保持两个电子设备之间的显示效果一致，可以对任一电子设备进行设置即可，因此，上述第一电子设备具体为提供设备基准参数的电子设备，即无需调整显示参数的电子设备；对应地，第二电子设备具体为对显示参数进行设置的电子设备，即待调整的电子设备。需要说明的是，上述“第一”和“第二”只是用于区分上述两个电子设备是否为需要调整显示参数的电子设备，若在其他场景下，第二电子设备也可以为提供设备基准参数的电子设备，第一电子设备也可以为需要调整的电子设备。
图4示出了本申请一实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法的交互流程图，详述如下：
在S401中，第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数。
在本实施例中，第一电子设备与第二电子设备可以建立有通信连接，并通过上述建立的通信连接发送关于本地的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数。该通信连接可以是有线通信连接，也可以是无线通信连接。以图1的场景为例进行说明，第一电子设备具体为一智能手机，而第二电子设备具体为一平板电脑，智能手机与平板电脑之间可以通过蓝牙模块、WiFi通信模块等建立无线通信连接，也可以通过串行数据连接线，接入上述两个设备对应的串行接口，从而建立两者之间的有线通信连接，在建立了通信连接后，智能手机可以将关于本机的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给平板电 脑。
在一种可能的实现方式中，若第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间建立的可以是有线通信连接，则上述两个电子设备可以通过串行接口建立有线通信连接。举例性地，在一种应用场景下，第一电子设备为智能手机，智能手机上配置有Type-C串行接口，第二电子设备为智能电视，智能电视上配置有高清多媒体接口(High Definition Multimedia Interface，HDMI)串口接口。在该情况下，用户可以将Type-C接口转HDMI接口的数据线***智能手机的Type-C串行接口，以及***智能电视的HDMI串行接口，从而建立上述两个电子设备间的有线通信连接。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一电子设备可以与第二电子设备之间建立的可以是无线通信连接。第一电子设备与第二电子设备上可以配置有无线通信模块，该无线通信模块可以为蓝牙通信模块、WIFI通信模块等通信模块，第一电子设备与第二电子设备可以基于无线通信模块建立无线通信连接。示例性地，图5示出了本申请一实施例提供的基于无线局域网络的连接示意图。参见图5所示，第一电子设备与第二电子设备均配置有WIFI通信模块，第一电子设备与第二电子设备均接入到当前所在场景下的无线局域网，该无线局域网可以由无线路由器发射的无线信号。在该情况下，第一电子设备与第二电子设备由于接入至同一无线局域网，并基于无线局域网建立无线通信连接。在该连接场景下，第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送设备基准参数时，需要通过无线路由器进行转发，即第一电子设备将所需发送的设备基准参数以及第二电子设备的网络地址封装为一个数据包，并发送给无线路由器，无线路由器基于该数据包内的网络地址，将数据包转发给第二电子设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在S401之前，上述电子设备的显示方法还可以包括：第一电子设备可以响应用户的连接操作，将连接指令发送给第二电子设备，以使第一电子设备与第二电子设备建立上述通信连接。具体地，上述连接操作可以为投屏操作、视频通话操作。若上述连接操作为投屏操作，则上述发送的连接指令可以为投屏指令。
示例性地，图6示出了本申请一实施例提供的发起投屏操作的示意图，在该实施例中，以第一电子设备为一智能手机、第二电子设备为一智能电视为例进行说明。参见图6中的(a)所示，智能手机的主界面上可以显示有“设备协同”的应用图标601，响应于用户关于应用图标601的点击操作，会显示可执行的协同操作，即协同操作界面，如图6中的(b)所示。该协同操作界面内包含有多种不同类型的协同操作，包括：投屏602、远程控制603、数据备份604等。智能手机可以响应于用户对于投屏602的点击操作，生成对应的可选设备列表，如图6中的(c)所示。其中，生成可选设备列表的方式可以为：智能手机可以向所连接的局域网的网络设备发送一个在线设备获取请求，网络设备响应于接收到的上述在线设备获取请求，获取当前接入局域网的所有电子设备的设备标识，并反馈给智能手机。智能手机可以接收网络设备反馈的设备标识，并生成上述的可选设备列表。智能手机可以响应用户基于上述可选设备列表反馈的选择操作，基于选择操作对应的设备标识确定智能手机所选连接投屏的设备，在本实施例中用户选择的为智能电视，并与智能电视建立用于投屏的通信连接。当然，若第一电子设备预设有默认投屏的电子设备，则第一电子设备在接收到用户发起的投屏操作时，可以直接与默认投屏的电子设备(例如为第二电子设备)建立用于投屏的 通信连接，无需用户进行手动选择。智能手机在确定需要投屏的智能电视后，可以将投屏指令发送给第二电子设备。若智能手机与智能电视建立了通信连接后，可以执行S401的操作，即智能手机将关于手机的硬件参数以及显示参数发送给智能电视。
需要说明的是，上述发起投屏操作的设备也可以是第二电子设备，具体连接过程与第一电子设备发起投屏操作相同，可以参见上述描述，在此不再赘述。
可选地，智能电视(即第二电子设备)接收到智能手机(即第一电子设备)发送的投屏指令后，可以生成确认提示信息，如图6中的(d)所示。该确认提示信息内包含有确认投屏的控件605以及拒绝投屏的控件606。智能电视在接收到用户发起关于控件605的选择操作(即确认投屏操作)，可以响应于上述投屏指令，与智能手机建立通信连接；对应地，智能电视在接收到用户发起关于控件606的选择操作(即拒绝投屏操作)，则无需响应上述投屏指令，不与智能手机建立通信连接。
在一种可能的实现方式中，若智能手机与智能电视已经基于投屏协议建立通信连接后，智能手机可以将所需投屏的数据内容通过上述通信连接发送给智能电视，以实现智能手机与智能电视同时显示指定的数据内容，如图6中的(e)所示。此时，智能电视可以保持原本的显示参数对投屏的数据内容进行显示，即智能手机并未发送第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数给智能电视，且智能电视未对本地的显示参数进行调整。在该情况下，智能手机上可以显示有显示效果同步的控件607。智能手机若检测到用户点击上述控件607，则表示用户需要统一智能手机与智能电视之间的显示效果，即响应于用户发起的显示效果同步操作，第一电子设备将设备基准参数发送给第二电子设备。通过配置上述显示效果同步的控件，能够根据使用需求选择是否需要进行显示效果的同步，实现了个性化的设备管理，避免在每次多设备协同显示同一数据内容时，无法根据场景确定是否需要同步显示效果，从而提高了显示效果同步的灵活性。
示例性地，图7示出了本申请一实施例提供的发起视频通话操作的示意图，在该实施例中，以第一电子设备为一智能手机、第二电子设备为一平板电脑为例进行说明。参见图7中的(a)所示，智能手机可以安装有通信应用程序，在启动该通信应用程序后，可以显示通信操作界面，该通信操作界面内包含通信对象列表，该通信对象列表包含有多个可通信的对象。智能手机可以响应用户发起的选择操作，确定所需通信的目标对象，并生成该目标对象对应的聊天界面，如图7中的(b)所示。该聊天界面内包含有多个可选的操作控件，例如发送图像的控件901、发送表情的控件902、视频聊天的控件903等。智能手机若接收到用户发起的关于控件903的点击操作(即视频通话的发起操作)，则可以向目标对象对应的电子设备发送通话连接请求，并显示通话链接等待界面，如图7中的(c)，在该实施例中目标对象对应的电子设备为第二电子设备，即平板电脑。其中，智能手机向平板电脑发送上述通话连接请求的方式具体可以为：智能手机将通话连接请求发送到云端服务器，该通话连接请求包含有目标对象的对象标识，云端服务器可以根据对象标识，确定登录该目标对象的电子设备的通信地址，并将上述通信连接请求转发给该通信地址关联的电子设备，即平板电脑。平板电脑在接收到上述连接请求后，可以显示有连接提示界面，该连接提示界面内包含接通通话的控件904，以及拒绝通话的控件905。平板电脑若接收到用户点击接通通话的控件904，则可以向智能手机反馈一个通话确认指令，并与智能手机建立通信连接， 并进行视频通话，如图7中的(d)所示。若智能手机与平板建立了通信连接后，可以执行S401的操作，即智能手机将手机的硬件参数以及手机的显示参数发送给平板电脑，从而开始了智能手机与平板电脑之间的显示效果的同步流程。当然，若平板电脑接收到用户点击拒绝通话的控件905，则表示不和智能手机进行视频通话，则拒绝响应上述连接请求，即不进行视频通话，此时无需进行两个电子设备间的显示同步，通过配置拒绝通话的控件905，在确定无需建立多设备间的协同显示时，无需对任一方的电子设备的显示参数进行重新设置，避免无效的显示参数的设置操作。
需要说明的是，上述发起视频通话操作的设备也可以是第二电子设备，具体连接过程与第一电子设备发起视频通话操作相同，可以参见上述描述，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，若智能手机与平板电脑已经基于视频通话协议建立通信连接后，智能手机可以将视频通话的画面通过上述通信连接发送给平板电脑，对应地，平板电脑也可以将本地采集到的视频通话画面通过上述通信连接发送给智能手机，如图7中的(d)所示。此时，平板电脑可以保持原本的显示参数对接收到的视频通话的画面进行显示，即智能手机并未发送手机的硬件参数以及显示参数给平板电脑，且平板电脑未对显示参数进行调整。在该情况下，智能手机和/或平板电脑上可以显示有显示效果同步的控件。智能手机和/或平板电脑若检测到用户点击上述控件，则表示用户需要统一智能手机与平板电脑之间的显示效果，即响应于用户发起的显示效果同步操作，智能手机将设备基准参数发送给平板电脑。
在本实施例中，第一电子设备存储有影响第一电子设备显示效果相关的参数，即上述设备基准参数，并通过与第二电子设备建立的通信连接，将设备基准参数发送给第二电子设备，以便第二电子设备可以基于上述设备基准参数对第二显示参数进行调整，以保持两个电子设备之间的显示效果一致。
上述第一显示参数具体为动态参量，即在不同的使用场景下，获取得到的第一显示参数可以是不同的，例如第一电子设备当前显示模块的显示亮度，根据用户的设置或场景光强动态调整，在该情况下，第一电子设备需要在需要与第二电子设备进行显示效果同步时，获取当前时刻对应的第一显示参数，并将当前时刻对应的第一显示参数发送给第二电子设备。
其中，第一硬件参数具体为：与第一电子设备本身的设备性能相关的参数，例如可以为第一电子设备的设备硬件信息、***信息、使用时长等。其中，设备硬件信息具体可以包含显示模块的硬件型号、模块尺寸、屏幕分辨率、屏幕材质等；***信息可以包含有操作***类型、操作***版本编号等。举例性地，屏幕材质包括但不限于：液晶显示(Liquid Crystal Display，LCD)屏幕、有机电激光显示(OrganicLight-Emitting Diode，OLED)屏幕等。
上述第一显示参数具体为可以是一动态参量，是电子设备可以通过软件设置的方式来进行调整的，即在不同的使用场景下，获取得到的第一显示参数可以是不同的，例如第一电子设备当前显示模块的显示亮度，根据用户的设置或场景光强动态调整，在该情况下，第一电子设备需要在需要与第二电子设备进行显示效果同步时，获取当前时刻对应的第一显示参数，并将当前时刻对应的第一显示参数发送给第二电子设备。其中，该第一显示参数具体为与第一电子设备的显示模块的显示配置相关的参数，例 如屏幕亮度、色域范围、锐度sharpen、三维查找表(3D Look UP Table，3D LUT)、白点信息。其中，白点信息具体指的是：显示模块内显示的最白的点，即显示模块显示255、255、255白色时候的颜色，通常使用色坐标xy或是色温K来表示。
需要说明的是，上述第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数可以包含上述两种类型参数中的若干项，具体根据使用场景进行确定，在此不对设备基准参数内包含的参数项的项数进行限定。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一电子设备可以将上述第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数封装到同一数据包内，并将上述两个类型的参数一并发送给第二电子设备。
在S402中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备接收到第一电子设备反馈的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数后，可以根据第二电子设备本地的第二硬件参数，以及通信对端的第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电子设备本地的第二显示参数，从而保证两个不同的电子设备间显示效果一致。
其中，第二电子设备确定第二显示参数的方式有两种，第一种是直接确定的方式，另一种则是对第二电子设备原本的第三显示参数进行调整的方式。具体描述如下：
第一种方式：直接确定的方式具体为：第二电子设备从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备可以存储有一对照参数关系表，该对照参数关系表中预先记录不同电子设备间显示参数的转换关系，第二电子设备可以根据本机的第二硬件参数，以及第一电子设备的第一硬件参数和第一显示参数，从上述对照关系表中进行查找，则可以获取得到能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备间显示效果一致的第二显示参数。其中，上述对照关系表可以存储于第二电子设备的本地存储器内，也可以存储于云端服务器上。若存储于云端服务器上，则第二电子设备可以通过与云端服务器进行通信，将第二电子设备的第二硬件参数，以及第一电子设备的第一硬件参数和第一显示参数发送给云端服务器，云端服务器可以查询上述对照参数关系表，确定得到对应的第二显示参数。
示例性地，表1示出了本申请一实施例提供的对照参数关系表。例如，第一电子设备对应的设备型号为A设备，而第二电子设备对应的设备型号为B设备，则若第一电子设备对应的亮度值(即第一显示参数)为80时，第二电子设备通过查找上述的对照关系表，可以直接得出，若需要保持第一电子设备与第二电子设备间的显示效果一致，则需要将第二电子设备的亮度值设置为90。
Figure PCTCN2022083803-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022083803-appb-000002
表1
第二种方式，对第二电子设备原本的第三显示参数进行调整具体可以包括以下两个步骤：
步骤1.第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数。
步骤2.第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
在本实施例中，上述第三显示参数具体是未调整前第二电子设备原本的显示参数。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备可以存储有校正参数表，该校正参数表内存储有不同的第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数关联的校正参数。第二电子设备可以在上述校正参数表内查询用于调整第二硬件参数与第一硬件参数之间差异而带来的显示效果差异的校正参数，将查找得到的校正参数作为用于调整第三显示参数的显示校正参数。其中，第三显示参数可以包含有多个不同的参数项，不同的参数项可以关联有对应的校正参数表；当然，一个校正参数表可以用于确定第三显示参数的多个参数项或所有参数项，在此不对上述校正参数表的格式以及形式进行限定。
示例性地，表2示出了本申请一实施例提供的校正参数表。参见表1所示，该校正参数表具体用于校正第二电子设备的第二显示参数中的亮度值这一参数项。若第一电子设备反馈的第一硬件参数内包含有两个参数项，分别为第一电子设备的设备型号(A型号)以及版本编号(2.0.1)，而第一电子设备发送的第一显示参数包括当前第一电子设备的显示模块的亮度值(60)，则可以通过查询下述的查询关系表，确定第二电子设备对应的显示校正参数，该显示校正参数具体为用于校正第二电子设备的显示模块的亮度值的校正系数，具体数值为0.86。
Figure PCTCN2022083803-appb-000003
表2
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备还可以存储有校正转换函数，第二电子设备可以将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数导入到上述的校正转换函数内，从而计算出该用于调整第三显示参数的显示校正参数。其中，该校正转换函数 具体可以是基于多组训练样本对神经网络进行训练学习后得到的函数，上述校正转换函数可以是多层卷积神经网络CNN、循环神经网络RNN、长短期LSTM神经网络等。其中，用于对神经网络进行训练学习的训练样本具体包含多组训练用的基准训练参数与其对应的训练校正参数，能够通过大数据训练学习的方式，对神经网络内包含的学习参数进行训练学习，从而精准得到设备基准参数与显示校正参数之间的对应关系，从而能够提高上述显示校正参数生成的准确性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述校正转换函数具体可以用于计算不同电子设备间的显示校正参数。在该情况下，第二电子设备除了可以将第一电子设备的设备基准参数导入到上述校正转换函数之前，可以基于第二电子设备的第二硬件参数对上述的校正转换函数内的学习参数进行调整，也可以将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数、第一显示参数与第二电子设备的第二硬件参数同时导入到上述校正转换函数内，从而计算得到上述显示校正参数。
需要说明的是，上述校正转换函数以及校正参数表，可以用于确定相同设备厂商的不同电子设备间的显示校正参数，也可以用于确定不同设备厂商的不同电子设备间的显示校正参数。上述校正转换函数以及校正参数表可以定期进行更新，例如市面上出现新的型号的电子设备，则可以生成与该新型号的电子设备关联的校正参数表，或采集关于该新信号的电子设备的训练样本，并基于该训练样本对上述的校正转换函数进行训练，以调整该校正转换函数内的学习参量，以使校正转换函数能够兼容新型号的电子设备。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备在确定了显示校正参数后，可以根据显示校正参数对本地的第三显示参数重新进行配置，从而得到第二显示参数，第二电子设备可以基于第二显示参数进行显示，从而使得在对同一显示对象进行显示时，第一电子设备的显示效果与第二电子设备的显示效果一致。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该显示校正参数包含有多个不同参数项对应的参数值，例如具体限定了亮度值、锐度值、饱和度数值等，在该情况下，第二电子设备可以将显示校正参数内关联的参数项的参数值赋值到本地的第三显示参数中对应的参数项，例如将显示校正参数中限定的亮度值作为调整得到的第二显示参数中的亮度值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该显示校正参数可以包含有若干参数项对应的调整比例，例如对于亮度值的调整比例为120％，在该情况下，第二电子设备可以根据上述调整比例对第三显示参数中关联的参数项进行调整，例如第二电子设备的亮度值为80，而调整比例为120％，则调整得到的第二显示参数的亮度值为96。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述显示校正参数还包含有第一显示参数，第二电子设备可以根据第一显示参数以及对应的调整比例，计算得到调整后的第二显示参数。例如，第二电子设备整体的显示效果偏暗，因此，对于亮度值的调整比例为120％。在该情况下，若只是上述调整比例但不清楚第一电子设备的亮度值，则无法保持两者之间的屏幕亮度一致，因此，上述显示校正参数可以包含有第一电子设备的亮度值，例如亮度值为80，若第二电子设备将亮度值设置为80，由于第二电子设备整体亮度偏暗，因此，以亮度值80进行显示时，屏幕亮度还是会暗于第一电子设备的屏幕亮度。基于此，第二电子设备需要将亮度值调整至与第一电子设备的亮度值相同的基础上，再叠 加上述调整比例，即将亮度值配置为96，才能保持两个电子设备的屏幕亮度一致。
示例性地，以对第二电子设备的色域进行调整为例进行说明。图8a～图8c示出了本申请一实施例提供的对第二显示参数内的色域进行调整的示意图。图8a为第二电子设备在对色域调整前的色域示意图，为了便于区别，后续将第二电子设备调整前的色域称为第一色域，该第一色域可以描绘在预设的色坐标系内，其中，该色坐标系可以是基于国际照明委员会(Commission Internationale de l′Eclairage，CIE)制定的色坐标系，在该色坐标系内，横坐标表示红色分量，纵坐标表示绿色分量，而由于所有分量均进行归一化处理，因此红色分量、绿色分量以及蓝色分量之和为1，因此基于xy的坐标，即可以得到三原色对应的数值，从而唯一确定一种颜色。在该色坐标系内包含有一三角形，该三角形内的三个顶点R、G以及B分别为表示基准红色、基准绿色以及基准蓝色所对应的坐标点，基于上述三个基准色，可以确定第二电子设备所对应的色域。其中，在三角区域内的点W，则表示白色像素点在色域坐标内对应的像素值。经过点W的弧线具体表示随色温变化，白点所对应的变化情况。通过图8a可以看出，第二电子设备的基准蓝色在色域坐标系内的坐标为(0.18,0.09)，基准绿色的坐标为(0.2,0.65)，而基准红色的坐标为(0.62,0.32)。图8b为第一电子设备的色域示意图，为了便于区别，后续将第一电子设备的色域称为第二色域，可以看出，第一电子设备的基准蓝色在色域坐标系内的坐标为(0.18,0.11)，基准绿色的坐标为(0.22，0.66)，而基准红色的坐标为(0.61,0.3)，由此可见，第一电子设备与第二电子设备在调整前，色域是存在差异的，对应地，白点坐标两者也存在一定的偏差。第二电子设备可以基于显示校正参数(该显示校正参数可以记录有三原色的坐标值)从而对第二电子设备的第一色域进行调整，从而得到调整后的色域，即第三色域，如图8c所示。对比第二电子设备调整后的第三色域以及第一电子设备的第二色域，可以看出两者的色域相同。对于其他显示参量均可以采用对应的方式进行配置，从而能够使得两个电子设备的显示效果一致。
在S403中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
在本实施例中，在确定了第二电子设备的第二显示参数后，若第一电子设备与第二电子设备对同一数据内容进行显示时，两者的显示效果会一致，从而解决了现有因设备间硬件设备不同而导致显示效果不一致的问题。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一电子设备可以将所需显示的数据内容发送给第二电子设备，第二电子设备在接收到数据内容后，可以根据本地的显示模块对数据内容进行对应的预处理得到第二图像(即在第二电子设备上显示的图像)，当然，第一电子设备也可以对数据内容进行对应的预处理，得到第一图像，从而使得数据内容在第二电子设备上进行显示时，与本地的显示模块相匹配，上述预处理可以包括对源数据的显示比例、分辨率等进行调整。举例性地，在投屏的应用场景下，上述数据内容具体为投屏数据，第一电子设备将投屏数据发送给第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以通过预设的投屏协议以及当前的投屏设置(例如分辨率以及帧率)等，对投屏数据进行处理，从而得到能够在第二电子设备上显示的图像数据，即第二图像。
对应地，第二电子设备也可以将所需显示的数据内容发送给第一电子设备，具体实现过程可以参见上述描述，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备所需显示的第二图像的数据内容，可以通过互联网或外部存储器获取，对应地，第一电子设备也可以通过互联网以及外部存储器获取第一图像的数据内容。
需要说明的是，若第二电子设备并不需要对数据内容进行处理，在该情况下，第一图像即为第二图像，第一图像与第二图像对应的数据内容为相同的图像数据。
需要说明的是，上述显示效果与电子设备的显示参数并不相同，显示效果具体是基于电子设备的硬件设备以及已设置的显示参数共同作用后对图像显示时表现的参数，上述显示效果具体可以包括：对比度、动态范围、色域、亮度和清晰度。以亮度为例进行说明，电子设备可以在预设的范围内对自身的亮度进行调整，例如，以50％的亮度进行显示，而实际电子设备的屏幕发光时对应的尼特(nit，一立方米对应的光强度)，除了与上述设置的亮度值相关外，还会与电子设备所使用的显示模块的材质相关，即电子设备对显示参数中的亮度值所设置的数值，并非电子设备的显示模块实际显示的亮度；以色温为例再进行说明，电子设备可以配置有对应的色温调节范围，并在预设的色温调节范围内调整屏幕输出的色温，而实际电子设备的屏幕输出对应的开尔文温度(K)同样并非单单与上述设置的色温相关，还会与电子设备的显示模块的色偏程度有关。基于此，在此引入了与显示参数不同的另一参量，即显示效果。
示例性地，以显示效果中的亮度nit为例进行说明。第一电子设备的屏幕亮度偏暗，而第二电子设备的屏幕亮度偏亮，在确定第二显示参数之前，若第一电子设备与第二电子设备均将背光亮度设置为80％(即第一显示参数与第三显示参数中的亮度均为80％)，而实际上通过屏幕显示同一图像时，通过亮度测量仪测得第一电子设备的发光亮度为700nit，而第二电子设备的发光亮度则为850nit，虽然两者显示参数(即背光亮度)一致，但实际测得屏幕的发光亮度并不相同(即显示效果不一致)，为了保持两者的显示效果一致，需要降低第二电子设备的背光亮度，例如将第二电子设备的背光亮度从80％降低至72％，此时，第二电子设备的第二显示参数(即第二电子设备的背光亮度)与第一电子设备的第一显示参数(即第一电子设备的背光亮度)不一致，但通过亮度测量仪对两者屏幕的发光亮度进行测量，得到对应的测量值均为700nit，即第一显示效果与第二显示效果一致，从而确定了两个电子设备的显示效果一致。
示例性地，图9a～图9c示出了本申请以实施例提供的显示效果中的对比度的比对示意图。其中，图9a是第二电子设备待调整前对某一图像的显示效果的示意图，图9b是第一电子设备对同一图像的显示效果的示意图。对比上述两个示意图可以看出，两者对于同一图像进行显示时，两个电子设备的显示效果会存在一定的差异。第二电子设备在显示该图像时，画面的阴影区域较深，对比度较高；而第一电子设备在显示该图像时，画面的阴影区域较浅，整体的对比度相对于第二电子设备而言较低。基于此，第二电子设备可以基于第一硬件参数、第一显示参数以及第二硬件参数确定第二显示参数，并基于第二显示参数重新对上述图像进行显示，图9c示出了第二电子设备基于第二显示参数对同一图像的显示效果的示意图，对比图9c与图9b可以看出，调整后的第二电子设备，与第一电子设备显示相同的图像时，显示效果是一致的。
需要说明的是，由于第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对待调整的第二显示参数进行调整，得到调整后的第二显示参数，并根据调整后的第二显示参数进行显示时，即可以保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备的显示效果一致，在该基础上，第一电子设备与第二电子设备并不一定需要获取第一显示效果以及第二显示效果具体的数值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，对应地，第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；而两个电子设备之间的显示效果一致具体指的是对应维度的数值较为接近，此时，可以认为两个电子设备之间的显示效果是一致的。需要说明的是，上述第一显示效果具体指的是，第一电子设备以第一显示参数显示数据内容时对应的显示效果；上述第二显示效果具体指的是，第二电子设备以第二显示参数显示数据内容时对应的显示效果。
基于此，上述二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，具体可以包括以下至少一种：
所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；即第一电子设备与第二电子设备均显示同一数据内容时，两者之间的对比度之差会小于预设的第一阈值。
所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；即第一电子设备与第二电子设备均显示同一数据内容时，两者之间的动态范围之差会小于预设的第二阈值。
所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；即第一电子设备与第二电子设备均显示同一数据内容时，两者之间的色域中各个颜色之差会小于预设的第三阈值。
所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；即第一电子设备与第二电子设备均显示同一数据内容时，两者之间的亮度之差会小于预设的第四阈值。
所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值；即第一电子设备与第二电子设备均显示同一数据内容时，两者之间的清晰度的评分之差会小于预设的第五阈值。
在本实施例中，显示效果一致具体指的是两个电子设备的显示效果对应的参数项是接近的，在一定的浮动范围内(即差值不大于预设的阈值)。
在一种可能实现方式中，上述第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值以及第五阈值均为0。
在本实施例中，由于清晰度是一个较为主观的参量，因此可以通过清晰度的评分来进行客观的衡量。其中，清晰度的评分具体可以通过显示预设的样图，根据可以观察得到的样图中线条的个数来确定电子设备的清晰度。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述显示效果还可以包含颜色，在确定第一显示效果以及第二显示效果是否一致时，还可以通过第一电子设备显示第一图像某一像素点的颜色与第二电子设备显示第二图像对应像素点的第二颜色之间的差值，确定两个电子设备之间的色差，若该色差小于预设的第六阈值，以及上述多个维度之间的差值均小于预设的阈值，则识别两个电子设备的显示效果一致。
以上可以看出，本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的显示方法可以通过将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给需要进行显示效果同步的第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以根据第二电子设备自身的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电子设备的第二显示参数，基于上述三个参数确定的第二显示参数可以消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因硬件器件不同而带来显示效果的影响，在后续显示的过程中，第二电子设备可以根据第二显示参数对数据内容进行显示，从而能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间对同一内容时对应的显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一数据内容显示时的显示效果产生偏差，提高了显示参数设置的准确性。另一方面，在用户需要同步任意两个电子设备之间的显示效果时，其中一个电子设备也能够根据另一电子设备反馈的硬件参数以及对端的显示参数确定本地的显示参数，上述显示参数的设置过程是设备自动执行的，对于用户而言是无感的，无需用户进行手动对显示参数进行配置以及频繁对设备的电子设备进行手动调节，从而能够提高参数设置的效率以及用户的使用体验。
进一步地，作为本申请的另一实施例，图10示出了本申请另一实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法的交互流程图。参见图10所示，本申请实施例提供的电子设备的显示方法中，设备基准参数具体包含第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，且第一电子设备分别发送上述两种参数的情况下，在该情况下，上述电子设备的显示方法具体包含S1001～S1005，详述如下：
在S1001中，第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一硬件参数。
在本实施例中，第一电子设备所需发送的设备基准参数具体包含两种类型的参数，分别为上述的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数。上述两个类型的参数在本实施例中是分开两次发送的。第一电子设备在需要与第二电子设备进行协同工作时，例如响应用户发起的投屏操作、视频通话操作或显示效果同步配置操作等协同操作时，可以通过已建立的通信连接将第一硬件参数发送给第二电子设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一硬件参数可以包含多个参数项，例如：显示模块的材质、屏幕生产商、屏幕尺寸、分辨率、刷新频率、设备***类型、设备***版本等参数项。由于第一硬件参数一般是较为固定的参量，例如与屏幕相关的参数项，如屏幕生产商、屏幕尺寸以及分辨率等，第一电子设备可以将上述第一硬件参数存储于可读寄存器关联的存储区域内，第一电子设备可以读取可读寄存器内关联的存储区域的数据，从而得到第一硬件参数，并将第一硬件参数发送给第二电子设备。
在S1002中，第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备在接收到第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数，可以基于第一硬件参数以及第二电子设备本地对应的第二硬件参数生成差异校正参数，其中，该差异校正参数用于校正第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因设备间差异产生的显示效果的差异。
举例性地，若第一电子设备的显示屏幕为LCD屏幕，而第二电子设备的显示屏幕为OLED屏幕，由于两个电子设备之间显示屏幕的材质的差异，会导致第一电子设备与第二电子设备间对同一数据内容时显示效果不一致。因此，第二电子设备可以根据 第一电子设备反馈的第一硬件参数确定第一电子设备的屏幕材质，并在确定与本机的屏幕材质不一致时，可以确定用于调整因屏幕差异而带来显示效果不一致的差异校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备可以存储有用于不同设备参数间对应的差异校正参数的设备校正参数表，第二电子设备可以查询上述设备校正参数表确定与第一电子设备的第一硬件参数关联的差异校正参数。示例性地，表3示出了本申请一实施例提供的设备校正参数表。参见表3所示，该设备校正参数表的设备参数包含多个参数项，分别为设备型号、屏幕材质以及***类型，当然，在其他应用场景下，该设备校正参数项包含的参数项数可以更多也可以更少，具体根据实际使用情况确定。例如，若第一电子设备反馈的第一硬件参数为(A型号，材质1,1.0.1)，则通过查询上述的差异校正参数为(0.88～0.92)。
Figure PCTCN2022083803-appb-000004
表3
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备可以存储有用于计算不同设备参数间的差异校正参数的差异校正转换函数。在该情况下，第二电子设备可以将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数(或者将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数与第二电子设备的第二硬件参数)导入到上述的差异校正转换函数内，从而计算出对应的差异校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述确定差异校正参数的方式包含两种，分别为在线方式以及离线方式。具体描述如下：
方式1：基于在线方式确定差异校正参数。在本申请实施例中的S1002具体包括以下两个步骤(分别为步骤1以及步骤2)，具体描述如下：
步骤1，所述第二电子设备将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备可以与云端服务器建立通信连接，并通过云端服务器得到上述的差异校正参数。在该实施例中，第二电子设备需要具有与互联网通信的能力，第二电子设备可以通过内置的移动通信模块接入移动通信网络，又或者通过内置的无线通信模块接入到所在场景下的网络设备，通过网络设备接入到互联网，当然，若第二电子设备配置有有线通信端口，也可以通过有线通信端口接入到路由设备，通过路由设备接入到互联网内，从而能够通过互联网和/或移动通信网络与云端服务器建立通信连接。
在本实施例中，与第一电子设备相同，第二电子设备同样可以获取本机中与显示效果相关的设备参数，即上述的第二硬件参数，对应地，第二硬件参数也可以包含以下参数项的一项或两个以上的组合：显示模块的材质、屏幕生产商、屏幕尺寸、分辨率、刷新频率、设备***类型、设备***版本等。第二电子设备获取第二硬件参数的方式与第一电子设备获取第一硬件参数的方式相同，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备在接收到用户的协同操作(如上述的投屏操作、视频通话操作或者显示效果同步操作)时，可以获取云端服务器的通信地址，并基于上述通信地址向云端服务器发送登录请求，该登录请求可以携带有第二电子设备的认证信息(如安装于第二电子设备的应用程序的程序标识码也可以是第二电子设备关联的用户账户的账户信息)，云端服务器在接收到上述登录请求后，可以基于上述的认证信息对第二电子设备进行身份认证，若认证通过，则向第二电子设备反馈一个登录成功信息。在第二电子设备接收到上述登录成功信息后，可以将从第一电子设备接收到的第一硬件参数以及本机的第二硬件参数封装成数据包，一并发送给云端服务器。
步骤2，所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在本实施例中，云端服务器在接收到第二电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数后，可以生成用于校正因两个设备参数差异而导致的显示效果差异的差异校正参数。具体地，云端服务器会将第一硬件参数识别为基准参数，而第二硬件参数识别为目标参数，即转换关系为由第二硬件参数指向第一硬件参数，以将第二电子设备的显示效果校正至与第一硬件参数对应的显示效果一致，得到上述的差异校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，云端服务器可以存储用于确定不同电子设备之间的差异校正参数的设备校正参数表。云端服务器可以从设备校正参数表中查找与第二电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数相匹配的列表单元，并基于上述列表单元记录的参数值作为上述的差异校正参数。
示例性地，图11示出了本申请一实施例提供的云端服务器基设备校正参数表确定差异校正参数的示意图。参见图11所示，该差异校正参数表包含有目标设备型号、基准设备型号、屏幕材质、刷新频率、分辨率，其中，不同的设备参数的参数项可以用于校正不同的显示参数，因此，不同的设备参数的参数项可以关联有对应的差异校正参数，例如，分辨率可以用于校正显示参数中的清晰度，刷新频率则用于校正插帧算法内的相关参数，屏幕材质则用于校正颜色算法内的相关参数，最大亮度则用于校正高动态光照渲染HDR的相关参数等。需要说明的是，上述确定的差异校正参数可以是一个参数范围，或者多个候选值，需要基于后续第一电子设备的第一显示参数进行进一步确定。举例性地，若第二电子设备的设备型号为A型号，该第二电子设备的屏幕材质为材质1，而刷新频率为频率2，分辨率1，则可以确定第二电子设备在上述设备校正参数表内对应的区域，并根据第一电子设备的第一硬件参数，从上述对应的区域内确定关联的差异校正参数。例如，第一电子设备的第一硬件参数为(C型号，材质1、频率2，分辨率2)，则可以得到参数2为本次查找得到的差异校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，云端服务器还可以存储有用于确定不同电子设备之间 的差异校正参数的转换函数，该转换函数可以是通过大量训练数据对神经网络进行训练后得到的是。上述训练数据内包含有训练基准设备参数、训练目标设备参数以及训练校正参数，云端服务器可以基于上述三类参量对原生的神经网络进行训练，直到上述神经网络对应的损失量满足预设的损失阈值时，则识别该神经网络已训练完毕，并将训练完毕的神经网络识别为上述的转换函数。云端服务器可以将第二电子设备上传的第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数导入到上述的转换函数内，则可以计算得到对应的差异校正参数，并将差异校正参数反馈给第二电子设备。
在本实施例中，云端服务器在计算得到用于消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备间因设备差异导致的显示效果不一致的差异校正参数后，可以通过与第二电子设备之间原本建立的通信连接，将差异校正参数反馈给第二电子设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备可以配置有预设的有效等待时长，第二电子设备将第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数发送给云端服务器后，可以开启等待计时器，若等待计时器的计数值大于上述的有效等待时长且未接收到云端服务器反馈的差异校正参数，则可以重新向云端服务器发送第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数，以便云端服务器重新计算差异校正参数。可选地，若云端服务器无法基于第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数生成差异校正参数时，云端服务器则无法在有效等待时长内反馈差异校正参数，此时，云端服务器可以向第二电子设备反馈转换失败信息，也可以不向第二电子设备反馈差异校正参数。在该情况下，第二电子设备若接收到上述转换失败信息或在有效等待时长内没有接收到差异校正参数，则可以输出参数设置失败信息，以便用户重新选择其他电子设备进行显示效果同步。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备接收到的差异校正参数可以是一个差异校正表，该差异校正表内记录有第一电子设备在以不同的第一显示参数进行显示时，第二电子设备所需配置的参数值。示例性地，表4示出了本申请一实施例提供的差异校正表。参见表4所示，该差异校正表具体用于调整第二电子设备的第二显示参数中的锐度值，由于第二电子设备只接收到第一电子设备的第一硬件参数，而与显示模块设置相关的第一显示参数并未接收到，因此，第一电子设备的锐度是待定的，在该情况下，上述差异校正表需要能够查询第一电子设备在不同锐度下，第二电子设备所需设置的锐度值。例如，若第一电子设备的锐度为0.3，则第二电子设备所需设置的锐度为0.38，以保证两个电子设备间的显示效果一致。
Figure PCTCN2022083803-appb-000005
表4
在本申请实施例中，第二电子设备可以将第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数上传给云端服务器，交由云端服务器计算对应的差异校正参数，从而第二电子设备无需承担计算差异校正参数的功能，减少了第二电子设备的计算压力，并且云端服务器往往计算能力较强，从而能够提高差异校正参数计算的准确性以及减少计算耗时，提高了显示效果校正的准确性。另一方面，第二电子设备无需存储有用于生成差异校正参数的相关数据，从而可以减少第二电子设备的存储压力。
方式2：基于离线方式确定差异校正参数。在本申请实施例中的S1002具体包括以下四个步骤(分别为步骤1～步骤4)，具体描述如下：
步骤1，所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备可以存储有一离线数据库，该离线数据库包含不同电子设备对应的校正参数包，该校正参数包具体用于对第二电子设备的第二显示参数进行设置，以使基于设置后的第二显示参数对图像进行显示时，该第二电子设备的显示效果与该校正参数包对应的电子设备的显示效果一致。例如，第二电子设备具体为Mate40，而某一校正参数包对应的电子设备为P40，则基于上述校正参数包对Mate40的第二显示参数进行设置后，基于设置后的第二显示参数对图像进行显示时，Mate40的显示效果会与P40的显示效果一致。基于此，存储在离线数据库内的各个校正参数包，会关联有对应的设备参数。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备可以根据第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数，从上述的离线数据库内查询是否有与第一硬件参数相匹配的校正参数包。若离线数据库内存储有第一硬件参数相匹配的校正参数包，则执行S1302的操作；反之，若离线数据库内并未存储有第一硬件参数相匹配的校正参数包，则执行S1303的操作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备识别第一硬件参数是否与校正参数包匹配的方式可以为：每个校正参数包可以与设备参数中的某项或某几项参数项相关联，例如，校正参数包可以与设备型号相关联，即不同的设备型号关联有对应的校正参数包。在该情况下，第二电子设备可以从第一硬件参数中确定第一电子设备对应的设备型号(即特定的参数项的参数值)，判断离线数据库内是否存在与第一电子设备的设备型号对应的校正参数包。若某一校正参数包对应的设备型号与第一电子设备的设备型号相同，则识别该校正参数包与第一硬件参数相匹配。对应地，若校正参数包与设备参数中的多个参数项相关联，则需要确定第一电子设备内对应的多个参数项与校正参数包的各个参数项是否相同，若相同，则识别该校正参数包与第一硬件参数相匹配；若第一硬件参数的任一参数项与校正参数包关联的参数项不同，则识别第一硬件参数与该校正参数包不匹配。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述校正参数包内可以存储有差异校正表，以便通过查询上述差异校正表确定对应的差异校正参数；该校正参数包内还可以存储有转换函数，以便第二电子设备可以通过导入设备参数至上述转换函数计算得到对应的差异校正参数。其中，差异校正表以及转换函数可以参见上述实施例的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
步骤2，所述第二电子设备从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
在本实施例中，若第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找到与第一硬件参数相匹配的校正参数包，则可以从校正参数包内提取得到上述的差异校正参数。其中，差异校正参数的形式可以参见上一实施例的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备的离线数据库内存储的所有校正参数包 均用于设置第二电子设备的显示参数，即每个校正参数包只用于对第二电子设备的第二显示参数进行设置，而不适用与除第二电子设备外的其他电子设备的显示参数进行设置。在该情况下，第二电子设备可以基于校正参数包中包含的各个校正参量，得到差异校正参数，无需从校正参数包中提取与第二硬件参数的关联的参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该校正数据包内包含用于对不同类型的电子设备的显示参数进行设置的差异校正参数，即该校正数据包适用于将所有电子设备的显示效果设置至与第一硬件参数对应的显示效果一致。举例性地，第一电子设备的设备型号为A型号，则第二电子设备可以从离线数据库中获取与A型号相对应的校正数据包，该校正数据包可以用于将不同的电子设备的显示效果设置到与A型号的显示效果一致，例如可以将除A型号外的其他不同型号的电子设备的显示效果设置到与A型号的显示效果相一致。在该情况下，第二电子设备可以根据本地对应的第二硬件参数，从校正数据包内提取与自身相关联(即与第二硬件参数关联)的差异校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述校正参数包内可以存储有不同电子设备关联的差异校正表，上述所有差异校正表的基准设备参数均为第一硬件参数，而上述差异校正表内的目标设备参数为与其关联的另一设备的设备参数。在该情况下，第二电子设备可以基于目标设备参数与本地的第二硬件参数进行匹配，将目标设备参数与第二硬件参数相匹配的差异校正表作为第二电子设备关联的差异校正表，将上述关联的差异校正表作为差异校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，上述校正参数包内可以存储有不同电子设备关联的转换函数，上述所有转换函数的基准设备参数均为第一硬件参数，而目标设备参数与不同的电子设备的设备参数相关联，与获取差异校正表的方式一致，第二电子设备可以从校正参数包选取与第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的转换函数，作为上述的差异校正参数。
步骤3，若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
在本实施例中，若第二电子设备的离线数据库内并没有存储有与第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，则需要采用在线获取的方式，将与第一硬件参数关联的校正参数包下载至本地存储，即存储至上述的离线数据库。在该情况下，第二电子设备可以生成一个下载请求，该下载请求用于将下载上述与第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该下载请求可以携带有第一硬件参数，以便云端服务器在接收到该下载请求后，可以基于其中携带的第一硬件参数获取与之对应的校正参数包，并基于校正参数包反馈给云端服务器。
进一步地，上述步骤3具体可以包括以下四个步骤，分别为：步骤3.1～步骤3.4，详述如下：
步骤3.1：若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备由于需要从云端服务器下载校正数据包，则需要与云端服务器建立通信连接，并且下载过程可能会产生流量消耗，在该情况下，需要获得用户的下载授权，因此，可以生成一个下载提示信息，以通知用户对上述的下载操 作进行确认。
示例性地，图12示出了本申请一实施例提供的校正参数包的下载过程的示意图。参见图12中的(a)所示，第二电子设备(例如为一智能电视)若在离线数据库内没有查找到与第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，则可以生成一个下载提示信息。该下载提示信息内包含有两个控件，分别为确认下载控件121以及拒绝下载控件122。若第二电子设备检测到用户点击控件121，则识别用户发起了确认操作，则执行步骤3.2；反之，若第二电子设备检测到用户点击控件122，则识别用户发起了拒绝操作，执行步骤3.3。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该下载提示信息配置有有效时长，参见图12中的(a)所示，该下载提示信息内配置有一计时控件123，例如，该有效时长为5秒。若在有效时长内并没有接收到用户对于确认下载控件121以及拒绝下载控件122的点击操作，则识别用户不同意进行校正数据包的下载操作，即执行步骤3.3的内容。
步骤3.2：所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
在本实施例中，若第二电子设备接收到用户发起的确认操作，则识别用户同意从云端服务器下载校正参数包，在该情况下，第二电子设备生成下载请求，并将下载请求发送给云端服务器，以便云端服务器反馈与第一硬件参数相匹配的校正参数包。
在一种可能的实现方式中，由于下载校正参数包具有一定的下载时间，此时，第二电子设备可以生成一个下载进度提示框，以便用户确定当前的下载进度，如图12中的(b)所示。
步骤3.3：所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器。
在本实施例中，若第二电子设备接收到用户发起的拒绝操作，则表示用户不同意从云端服务器下载校正参数包，此时，为了能够继续实现显示效果的同步操作，可以将获取差异校正参数的步骤交由云端服务器完成。基于此，第二电子设备可以将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及关于自身的第二硬件参数阿送给云端服务器，以便云端服务器可以基于上述两个参数计算得到差异校正参数。需要说明的是，云端服务器计算差异校正参数的方式可以参见在线获取方式中的步骤1的相关描述，具体实现过程完全相同，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，由于云端服务器计算差异校正参数需要一定的计算时长，此时，第二电子设备可以生成一个计算进度提示框，以便用户确定当前的计算进度，如图12中的(c)所示。
步骤3.4：所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
在本实施例中，步骤4的实现方式与在线获取方式中的步骤2的实现方式完全相同，具体描述可以参见在线获取方式中的步骤2的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中，在需要从云端服务器处下载校正参数包时，生成下载提示信息，以便用户确定是否执行下载操作，继而采用对应的方式获取差异校正参数，从而 能够提高差异校正参数获取方式的多样性，也能够避免在用户待确认的情况下因下载校正参数包而耗费过多网络流量以及占用设备的存储资源的情况，提高了用户的使用体验。
步骤4，所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
在本实施例中，云端服务器在接收到第二电子设备发送的校正参数包的下载请求后，可以根据下载请求中携带有的第一硬件参数，获取与之关联的校正参数包，并将与第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包发送给第二电子设备。第二电子设备在接收到云端服务器发送的校正参数包后，可以执行S1302的操作，即从校正参数包内提取差异校正参数。
在本申请实施例中，第二电子设备可以预先下载与第一电子设备相关的校正参数包，继而后续在进行与第一电子设备的显示效果同步的过程中，无需再次联网完成，而是可以通过本地存储的校正参数包得到差异校正参数，从而能够减少获取差异校正参数的浏览消耗，也因为无需与云端服务器通信，也能够进一步提高差异校正参数的获取效率，提高了显示效果同步的响应速度。
在S1003中，第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一显示参数。
在本实施例中，第一电子设备在发送了第一硬件参数后，可以将与本地显示设置相关的第一显示参数发送给第二电子设备。其中，发送第一显示发送的方式与发送第一硬件参数的方式相同，均是可以通过第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间已经建立的通信连接进行发送。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一显示参数可以包含多个参数项，例如：显示模块的屏幕亮度、色域、白点坐标、屏幕色温、锐度、饱和度、显示模式等与显示相关的参数。其中，显示模式具体可以包括：影院模式、护眼模式、锐利模式等，不同的显示模式下可以关联有对应的显示参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第一显示参数是可以由用户手动设置，也可以根据第一电子设备所在的场景进行动态调整，例如，第一电子设备可以根据当前所在场景的环境光强，调整第一电子设备的显示模块的屏幕亮度，又或者，根据当前显示模块的数据内容，调整屏幕的对比度以及屏幕亮度(若显示的图片整体色调较暗，则可以适当提高屏幕亮度；若显示的图片整体色调较亮，则可以适当降低屏幕亮度等)。由此可见，第一显示参数是一个可变的参量，在该情况下，第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送的第一显示参数，具体是获取接收到用户发起的协同操作时刻，该第一电子设备所对应的显示参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二电子设备在获取到差异校正参数后，可以向第一电子设备发送一个显示参数反馈请求，第一电子设备在接收到上述显示参数反馈请求后，可以获取当前时刻对应的第一显示参数，并将第一显示参数发送给第二电子设备。可选地，上述显示参数反馈请求内可以包含有所需反馈的显示参数的参数项，在该情况下，第一电子设备可以基于显示参数反馈请求的参数项，获取每个参数项对应的参 数值，并生成第一显示参数，将第一显示参数发送给第二电子设备。
在S1004中，第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
在本实施例中，第二电子设备在接收到第一显示参数后，可以基于第一显示参数对差异校正参数进行调整，从而得到用于对第二电子设备的第二显示参数进行设置的显示校正参数。由于在获取差异校正参数时，第一电子设备的第一显示参数是未知的，第一显示参数的参数值不同，可能对应的不同的调整比例。示例性地，继续参见表3所示，该差异校正表用于校正第二显示参数中的锐度，根据第一电子设备的不同锐度，所需调整的锐度值不同，因此，需要确定第一电子设备的第一显示参数，以确定所需对第二显示参数设置的锐度值。基于此，第二电子设备在确定了第一电子设备的第一显示参数之后，可以基于第一显示参数对应参数项的参数值，从差异校正参数内获取与该参数项对应的参数值关联的校正系数，基于所有参数项的校正系数，得到上述显示校正参数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，获取显示校正参数的方式也可以包括在线获取以及离线获取两种方式。
对于在线获取方式：与获取差异校正参数相似，第二电子设备可以将第一显示参数以及第二显示参数发送给云端服务器，并接收云端服务器基于第一显示参数以及第二显示参数反馈的显示校正参数。具体地，云端服务器可以存储有上述的差异校正参数，该差异校正参数可以为一校正参数表，也可以为校正参数转换函数，云端服务器可以根据第一显示参数以及第二显示参数，查询上述的校正参数表或导入上述校正参数转换函数，从而可以得到对应的显示校正参数，并将显示校正参数发送给第二电子设备。需要说明的是，若采用在线获取显示校正参数的方式，则云端服务器可以不将差异校正参数发送给第二电子设备，而第二电子设备可以将第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数发送给云端服务器后，云端服务器可以根据上述两个参数确定差异校正参数，并反馈一个接收成功的信息给第二电子设备，第二电子设备在接收到上述云端服务器发送的接收成功的信息后，可以将接收到的第一显示参数发送给云端服务器，云端服务器可以根据第一显示参数以及上述确定的差异校正参数，确定显示校正参数，并将显示差异参数发送给第二电子设备。
对于离线获取方式：第二电子设备可以根据差异校正参数以及第一硬件参数在本地计算显示校正参数，无需将上述两个参数再次上传给云端服务器进行计算。举例性地，差异校正参数内存储有基于显示参数的不同参数值标定好的一组离散数值，第二电子设备可以根据第一显示参数从多个离散数值中选取对应的一个，作为上述的显示校正参数；在一种可能的实现方式中，若上述差异校正参数中没有与第一显示参数相匹配的离散数值，则可以选取与第一显示参数最接近的两个点进行线性插值计算，以得到与该第一显示参数相匹配的差异校正参数，其中，上述线性插值公式具体可以为：
Figure PCTCN2022083803-appb-000006
其中，x 0为第一显示参数的参数值，x 2和x 1为差异校正参数中与第一显示参数相邻的 其他两个离散数值；f(x 1)和f(x 2)为上述两个离散数值对应的显示校正参数；f(x 0)为第一显示参数对应的显示校正参数。
在本申请实施例中，第二电子设备可以根据第一硬件参数得到差异校正参数，并接收第一电子设备反馈的第一显示参数，基于差异校正参数以及第一显示参数得到显示校正参数，从而能够兼顾电子设备因硬件以及显示设置两个方面的差异而带来的显示效果的差异，从而能够提高显示效果调整的准确性。
在S1005中，所述第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第三显示参数进行调整，得到第二显示参数。
在本实施例中，由于S1005的具体实现过程与S402的实现过程完全相同，具体描述可以参见S402的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在S1006中，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
在本实施例中，由于S1006的具体实现过程与S403的实现过程完全相同，具体描述可以参见S403的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中，第一电子设备分别发送第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，第二电子设备可以基于第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数获取得到对应的差异校正参数，从而能够得到一个大致的调整范围，继而根据第一显示参数对上述差异校正参数进行微调，继而得到显示校正参数，实现了精准确定显示校正参数的目的，并且考虑了不同电子设备间软件以及硬件两个方面的差异，提高了显示效果同步的准确性。
上述实施例是以第一电子设备与第二电子设备双方交互的角度说明了电子设备的显示方法的实现过程，本申请的另一实施例以第一电子设备为流程的执行主体，说明电子设备的显示方法的实现过程。本申请实施例提供的第一电子设备侧的电子设备的显示方法的实现过程详述如下：
步骤1，所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作，将投屏指令发送给所述投屏操作对应的所述第二电子设备。
步骤2，第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，以使所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
步骤3，所述第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送数据内容，所述第二电子设备基于第二显示参数显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备基于第一显示参数显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
可选地，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
上述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，包括以下至少一种：
所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
可选地，所述第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，包括：
步骤2.1，所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一硬件参数，以使所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数。
步骤2.2，所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一显示参数，以使所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
在本申请实施例中，第一电子设备可以将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给需要进行显示效果同步的第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以根据第二电子设备自身的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电子设备的第二显示参数，基于上述三个参数确定的第二显示参数可以消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因硬件器件不同而带来显示效果的影响，在后续显示的过程中，第二电子设备可以根据第二显示参数对数据内容进行显示，从而能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间对同一内容时对应的显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一数据内容显示效果产生偏差，提高了显示参数设置的准确性。
本申请的另一实施例以第二电子设备为流程的执行主体，说明电子设备的显示方法的实现过程。本申请实施例提供的第二电子设备侧的电子设备的显示方法的实现过程详述如下：
步骤1，第二电子设备接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数。
步骤2，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
步骤3，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
可选地，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，包括以下至少一种：
所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
可选地，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
所述第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
可选地，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
可选地，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
可选地，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
所述第二电子设备从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
可选地，所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，包括：
若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
可选地，所述若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求，包括：
若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
可选地，在若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息之后，还包括：
所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将关于 所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
可选地，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
所述第二电子设备从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
可选地，在所述第二电子设备接收第一电子设备发送的设备基准参数之前，还包括：
所述第二电子设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的投屏指令，所述投屏指令是所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作时生成的。
在本申请实施例中，第一电子设备可以将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给需要进行显示效果同步的第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以根据第二电子设备自身的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电子设备的第二显示参数，基于上述三个参数确定的第二显示参数可以消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因硬件器件不同而带来显示效果的影响，在后续显示的过程中，第二电子设备可以根据第二显示参数对数据内容进行显示，从而能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间对同一内容时对应的显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一数据内容显示时的显示效果产生偏差，提高了显示参数设置的准确性。
对应于上文第一电子设备侧的电子设备的显示方法，本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备的显示装置的结构，为了便于说明，仅示出了与本申请实施例相关的部分。
该电子设备的显示装置包括：
设备基准参数发送单元，用于向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，以使所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数。
其中，上述设备基准参数发送单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中的无线通信模块160实现，也可以通过移动通信模块150实现，当然，若第一电子设备与第二电子设备建立的是有线通信连接，也可以通过通用串行总线接口130将设备基准参数发送给第二电子设备。
需要说明的是，上述发送设备基准参数可以存储于内部存储器121中。
第一显示效果同步单元，用于向第二电子设备发送数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
其中，上述第一显示效果同步单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中显示屏194实现，通过显示屏194输出第一图像。
可选地，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
所述第一显示效果同步单元，包括以下至少一种：
第一对比度同步单元，用于第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
第一动态范围同步单元，用于第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
第一色域同步单元，用于第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
第一亮度同步单元，用于第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
第一清晰度同步单元，用于第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值；
其中，上述第一对比度同步单元、第一动态范围同步单元、第一色域同步单元、第一亮度同步单元以及第一清晰度同步单元均可以通过显示屏194实现。
可选地，所述设备基准参数发送单元，包括：
第一硬件参数发送单元，用于向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一硬件参数，以使所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数，得到差异校正参数。
第一显示参数发送单元，用于向所述第二电子设备发送所述第一显示参数，以使所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
同样地，与基准参数发送单元相同，第一硬件参数发送单元以及第一显示参数发送单元也可以通过上述多个模块实现。
可选地，电子设备的显示装置还包括：
投屏操作响应单元，用于响应用户发起的投屏操作，将投屏指令发送给所述投屏操作对应的所述第二电子设备。
其中，上述投屏操作响应单元具体可以通过传感器模块180实现，该传感器模块180中包含有不同类型的传感器，而实现投屏操作响应单元的传感器具体可以为压力传感器180A以及触摸传感器180K。
在本申请实施例中，第一电子设备可以通过将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给需要进行显示效果同步的第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以根据第二电子设备自身的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电子设备的第二显示参数，基于上述三个参数确定的第二显示参数可以消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因硬件器件不同而带来显示效果的影响，在后续显示的过程中，第二电子设备可以根据第二显示参数对数据内容进行显示，从而能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间对同一内容时对应的显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一数据内容显示时显示效果存在偏差，提高了显示参数设置的准确性。
实施例二：
对应于上文第二电子设备侧的电子设备的显示方法，本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备的显示装置的结构，为了便于说明，仅示出了与本申请实施例相关的部分。
该电子设备的显示装置包括：
设备基准参数接收单元，用于接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数。
其中，上述设备基准参数接收单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中的无线通信模块160实现，也可以通过移动通信模块150实现，当然，若第一电子设备与第二电子设备建立的是有线通信连接，也可以通过通用串行总线接口130接收第一电子设备发送的设备基准参数。
第二显示参数确定单元，用于根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
其中，上述第二显示参数确定单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中的处理器110实现，处理器对显示屏的显示参数进行设置，将设置后的第二显示参数存储于内部存储器121中。
第二显示效果同步单元，用于根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
其中，上述第二显示效果同步单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中的显示屏194实现，通过显示屏194显示第二图像。其中，第二图像对应的源数据可以存储于电子设备100中的内部存储器121中。
可选地，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
所述第二显示效果同步单元，包括以下至少一种：
第二对比度同步单元，用于所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
第二动态范围同步单元，用于所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
第二色域同步单元，用于所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
第二亮度同步单元，用于所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
第二清晰度同步单元，用于所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
其中，上述第二对比度同步单元、第二动态范围同步单元、第二色域同步单元、第二亮度同步单元以及第二清晰度同步单元均可以通过显示屏194实现。
可选地，所述第二显示参数确定单元，包括：
显示校正参数生成单元，用于基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
其中，上述显示校正参数生成单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中的处理器110实现，处理器对第一硬件参数、第一显示参数和第二硬件参数进行处理，从而得到显示校正参数。
显示参数调整单元，用于基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
其中，上述显示参数调整单元具体可以通过图2所示的电子设备100中的处理器110实现，其中，处理器110可以从内部存储器121中获取本地的第三显示参数，继而基于显示校正参数对第三显示参数进行调整，从而得到调整得到的第二显示参数，并重新存储于内部存储器121中。在根据调整后的第二显示参数显示时，则具体是基于显示屏194实现的。
可选地，所述设备基准参数接收单元包括：
第一硬件参数接收单元，用于接收所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数；
第一显示参数接收单元，用于接收所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一显示参数；
其中，上述两个接收单元与设备基准参数接收单元一致，可以通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150以及通用串行总线接口130实现。
所述显示校正参数生成单元包括：
差异校正参数生成单元，用于基于所述第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
显示校正参数获得单元，用于根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
其中，差异校正参数生成单元以及显示校正参数获得单元具体可以通过处理器110实现。
可选地，所述差异校正参数生成单元包括：
第一硬件参数上传单元，用于将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
第一差异校正参数接收单元，用于接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
其中，第一硬件参数上传单元以及第一差异校正参数接收单元，可以通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150实现。
可选地，所述差异校正参数生成单元包括：
校正参数包查找单元，用于从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
其中，离线数据库具体可以存储于内部存储器121中，查找离线数据包具体可以通过处理器110实现，处理器110从内存存储器121查收得到对应的校正参数包。
差异校正参数提取单元，用于从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
其中，差异校正参数提取单元具体可以基于处理器110实现。
可选地，所述校正参数包查找单元包括：
校正参数包下载单元，用于若在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
校正参数包接收单元，用于接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
其中，校正参数包下载单元以及校正参数包接收单元，可以通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150实现。
可选地，所述校正参数包下载单元包括：
下载提示信息生成单元，用于若在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
其中，下载提示信息生成单元可以基于显示屏194实现，通过显示屏194显示下载提示信息。
确认下载响应单元，用于响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
其中，确认下载响应单元可以基于传感器模块180实现，具体可以通过压力传感器180A以及触摸传感器1850E获取用户的确认操作。在确定需要下载时，通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150实现向云端服务器发送下载请求。
可选地，校正参数包下载单元包括：
拒绝下载响应单元，用于响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
其中，拒绝下载响应单元可以基于传感器模块180实现，具体可以通过压力传感器180A以及触摸传感器1850E获取用户的拒绝操作。在确定不需要下载参数数据包时，通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150实现向云端服务器发送第一硬件参数。
第二差异校正参数接收单元，用于接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
其中，第二差异校正参数接收单元可以通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150实现。
可选地，所述第二显示参数确定单元，具体用于从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
可选地，所述电子设备的显示装置还包括：
投屏指令接收单元，用于接收所述第一电子设备发送的投屏指令，所述投屏指令是所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作时生成的。
其中，上述投屏指令接收单元可以通过无线通信模块160、移动通信模块150以及通用串行总线接口130实现。
在本申请实施例中，第一电子设备可以通过将第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数发送给需要进行显示效果同步的第二电子设备，第二电子设备可以根据第二电子设备自身的第二硬件参数、第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数，来确定第二电 子设备的第二显示参数，基于上述三个参数确定的第二显示参数可以消除第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间因硬件器件不同而带来显示效果的影响，在后续显示的过程中，第二电子设备可以根据第二显示参数对数据内容进行显示，从而能够保证第一电子设备与第二电子设备之间对同一内容时对应的显示效果保持一致，避免因硬件模块差异或显示设置的不同，对同一数据内容显示时的显示效果产生偏差，提高了显示参数设置的准确性。
需要说明的是，上述装置/单元之间的信息交互、执行过程等内容，由于与本申请方法实施例基于同一构思，其具体功能及带来的技术效果，具体可参见方法实施例部分，此处不再赘述。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为了描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能单元、模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能单元、模块完成，即将所述装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能单元或模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。实施例中的各功能单元、模块可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中，上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。另外，各功能单元、模块的具体名称也只是为了便于相互区分，并不用于限制本申请的保护范围。上述***中单元、模块的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种电子设备，该电子设备包括：至少一个处理器、存储器以及存储在所述存储器中并可在所述至少一个处理器上运行的计算机程序，所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时实现上述任意各个方法实施例中的步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现可实现上述各个方法实施例中的步骤。
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在移动终端上运行时，使得移动终端执行时实现可实现上述各个方法实施例中的步骤。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程，可以通过计算机程序来指令相关的硬件来完成，所述的计算机程序可存储于一计算机可读存储介质中，该计算机程序在被处理器执行时，可实现上述各个方法实施例的步骤。其中，所述计算机程序包括计算机程序代码，所述计算机程序代码可以为源代码形式、对象代码形式、可执行文件或某些中间形式等。所述计算机可读介质至少可以包括：能够将计算机程序代码携带到拍照装置/电子设备的任何实体或装置、记录介质、计算机存储器、只读存储器(ROM，Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM，Random Access Memory)、电载波信号、电信信号以及软件分发介质。例如U盘、移动硬盘、磁碟或者光盘等。在某些司法管辖区，根据立法和专利实践，计算机可读介质不可以是电载波信号和电信信号。
在上述实施例中，对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分，可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
在本申请所提供的实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置/网络设备和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置/网络设备实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通讯连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通讯连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
以上所述实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案，而非对其限制；尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明，本领域的普通技术人员应当理解：其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改，或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换；而这些修改或者替换，并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的精神和范围，均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。

Claims (24)

  1. 一种电子设备的显示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数；
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
    所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，包括以下至少一种：
    所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
    所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
    所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
    所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
    所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
    所述第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
    所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
    所述第二电子设备从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，包括：
    若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
    所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求，包括：
    若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
    所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的显示方法，其特征在于，在若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息之后，还包括：
    所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
    所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
  11. 根据权利要求1-10任一项所述的显示方法，其特征在于，在所述第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送关于所述第一电子设备的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数之前，还包括：
    所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作，将投屏指令发送给所述投屏操作对应的所述第二电子设备。
  12. 一种电子设备的显示方法，应用于第二电子设备，其特征在于，包括：
    所述第二电子设备接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数；
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以 及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数；
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第二显示参数显示所述第一电子设备发送的数据内容，所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第一显示效果包括以下至少一种：第一对比度、第一动态范围、第一色域、第一亮度、第一清晰度，所述第二显示效果包括以下至少一种：第二对比度、第二动态范围、第二色域、第二亮度、第二清晰度；
    所述第二电子设备显示所述数据内容的第一显示效果与所述第一电子设备显示所述数据内容的第二显示效果一致，包括以下至少一种：
    所述第一对比度与所述第二对比度之间的差值小于预设的第一阈值；
    所述第一动态范围与所述第二动态范围之间的差值小于预设的第二阈值；
    所述第一色域与所述第二色域之间的差值小于预设的第三阈值；
    所述第一亮度与所述第二亮度之间的差值小于预设的第四阈值；
    所述第一清晰度的评分与所述第二清晰度的评分之间的差值小于预设的第五阈值。
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数；
    所述第二电子设备基于所述显示校正参数对第二电子设备的第三显示参数进行调整，得到所述第二显示参数。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数、所述第一显示参数和所述第二硬件参数，生成显示校正参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数；
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第一显示参数以及所述差异校正参数，得到所述显示校正参数。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数以及第二硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备将所述第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
    所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备基于所述第一硬件参数，得到差异校正参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包；
    所述第二电子设备从所述校正参数包内提取与所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数关联的所述差异校正参数。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备从离线数据库内查找与所述第一硬件参数匹配的校正参数包，包括：
    若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求；
    所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述下载请求反馈与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载请求，并向云端服务器发送所述下载请求，包括：
    若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息；
    所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的确认操作，则生成所述下载请求，并向所述云端服务器发送所述下载请求。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的显示方法，其特征在于，在若所述第二电子设备在所述离线数据库内未查找到与所述第一硬件参数匹配的所述校正参数包，则生成下载提示信息之后，还包括：
    所述第二电子设备响应于用户基于所述下载提示信息发起的拒绝操作，则将关于所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数以及所述第一电子设备发送的所述第一硬件参数上传给云端服务器；
    所述第二电子设备接收所述云端服务器基于所述第一硬件参数以及所述第二硬件参数反馈的所述差异校正参数。
  21. 根据权利要求12所述的显示方法，其特征在于，所述第二电子设备根据所述第二电子设备的第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数，确定第二显示参数，包括：
    所述第二电子设备从预设的对照参数关系表中查找与所述第二硬件参数、所述第一硬件参数以及所述第一显示参数匹配的预设参数，将所述预设参数作为所述第二显示参数。
  22. 根据权利要求12-21任一项所述的显示方法，其特征在于，在所述第二电子设备接收第一电子设备发送的第一硬件参数以及第一显示参数之前，还包括：
    所述第二电子设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的投屏指令，所述投屏指令是所述第一电子设备响应用户发起的投屏操作时生成的。
  23. 一种电子设备，包括一个或多个触摸屏，一个或多个存储器，一个或多个处理器；其中所述一个或多个储存器存储有一个或多个程序；其特征在于，当所述一个或多个处理器在执行所述一个或多个程序时，使得所述电子设备实现如权利要求12至22任一项所述的方法。
  24. 一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，其特征在于，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求12至22任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/083803 2021-03-31 2022-03-29 电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质 WO2022206780A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110354665.2A CN115145516A (zh) 2021-03-31 2021-03-31 电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质
CN202110354665.2 2021-03-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022206780A1 true WO2022206780A1 (zh) 2022-10-06

Family

ID=83405275

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/083803 WO2022206780A1 (zh) 2021-03-31 2022-03-29 电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115145516A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022206780A1 (zh)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001255865A (ja) * 2000-03-13 2001-09-21 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd 情報表示装置
CN106325787A (zh) * 2015-06-17 2017-01-11 联想(北京)有限公司 一种信息处理方法及电子设备
CN107170424A (zh) * 2017-06-30 2017-09-15 联想(北京)有限公司 一种显示控制方法，显示方法及电子设备
CN111031007A (zh) * 2019-11-22 2020-04-17 珠海豹趣科技有限公司 电子白板间的通信控制方法、装置及服务器
CN111383608A (zh) * 2018-12-29 2020-07-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 显示控制方法和装置、电子设备以及计算机可读存储介质

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001255865A (ja) * 2000-03-13 2001-09-21 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd 情報表示装置
CN106325787A (zh) * 2015-06-17 2017-01-11 联想(北京)有限公司 一种信息处理方法及电子设备
CN107170424A (zh) * 2017-06-30 2017-09-15 联想(北京)有限公司 一种显示控制方法，显示方法及电子设备
CN111383608A (zh) * 2018-12-29 2020-07-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 显示控制方法和装置、电子设备以及计算机可读存储介质
CN111031007A (zh) * 2019-11-22 2020-04-17 珠海豹趣科技有限公司 电子白板间的通信控制方法、装置及服务器

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115145516A (zh) 2022-10-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111316598B (zh) 一种多屏互动方法及设备
WO2022257977A1 (zh) 电子设备的投屏方法和电子设备
WO2022100610A1 (zh) 投屏方法、装置、电子设备及计算机可读存储介质
CN113923230B (zh) 数据同步方法、电子设备和计算机可读存储介质
CN112119641B (zh) 通过转发模式连接的多tws耳机实现自动翻译的方法及装置
CN112532892B (zh) 图像处理方法及电子装置
CN111628916B (zh) 一种智能音箱与电子设备协作的方法及电子设备
WO2022017261A1 (zh) 图像合成方法和电子设备
WO2022033320A1 (zh) 蓝牙通信方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质
WO2022100685A1 (zh) 一种绘制命令处理方法及其相关设备
WO2021052342A1 (zh) 电子设备调整画面色彩的方法和装置
WO2022116930A1 (zh) 内容共享方法、电子设备及存储介质
WO2022012444A1 (zh) 多设备协作的方法、电子设备及多设备协作***
WO2022001258A1 (zh) 多屏显示方法、装置、终端设备及存储介质
CN114827581A (zh) 同步时延测量方法、内容同步方法、终端设备及存储介质
WO2022206764A1 (zh) 一种显示方法、电子设备和***
WO2022135144A1 (zh) 自适应显示方法、电子设备及存储介质
WO2021052388A1 (zh) 一种视频通信方法及视频通信装置
WO2023015985A1 (zh) 图像处理方法与电子设备
WO2022161006A1 (zh) 合拍的方法、装置、电子设备和可读存储介质
WO2022095820A1 (zh) 一种文本输入的方法、电子设备和***
WO2022135254A1 (zh) 一种编辑文本的方法、电子设备和***
WO2022033344A1 (zh) 视频防抖方法、终端设备和计算机可读存储介质
WO2022206780A1 (zh) 电子设备的显示方法、装置、电子设备以及可读存储介质
WO2022062902A1 (zh) 一种文件传输方法和电子设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22778962

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22778962

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1